Motorola Digital Ds6708 Users Manual Symbol Scanner Product Reference Guide (72E 86039 05 Rev A)

DS6708 to the manual d0ae11bd-91c7-4dbf-9f75-2f1226f87759

2015-01-23

: Motorola Motorola-Digital-Ds6708-Users-Manual-272128 motorola-digital-ds6708-users-manual-272128 motorola pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 458 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner
Product Reference Guide
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner
Product Reference Guide
72E-86039-06
Revision A
October 2009
ii Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
© 2007-2009 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means,
without permission in writing from Motorola. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to
change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on
a licensed basis. Motorola grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each
software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license
may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of
Motorola. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under
copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with
other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a
network without written permission from Motorola. The user agrees to maintain Motorola’s copyright notice on
the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in
whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed
program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or
design.
Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of
any product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Motorola, Inc.,
intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in
Motorola products.
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the US Patent &
Trademark Office. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Microsoft, Windows and ActiveSync
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product or service names
are the property of their respective owners.
Motorola, Inc.
One Motorola Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility
Patents
This product is covered by one or more of the patents listed on the Web site:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/patents.
Warranty
For the complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement, go to:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/warranty.
iii
Revision History
Changes to the original manual are listed below:
Change Date Description
-01 Rev A 01/2007 Initial Release.
-02 Rev A 04/2007 Update service information, update operating temperature and drop specifications,
remove sealing specification, correct Symbol PTC Terminal bar code, add new
UPC/EAN supplemental options, Bookland ISBN format, 4State Postal, Aztec, and
and inverse code type parameters, changed RSS references to GS1 DataBar.
-03 Rev A 09/2007 Update decode ranges.
-04 Rev A 10/2008 -Add:
- Fuzzy 1D, Decode Mirror Images, Low Light Enhancement, and Presentation
Mode Field of View parameters, Code 128 Lengths, and Post US4.
- DS6708-DL chapter.
-Update Motorola Web sites.
-Change:
- UCC/EAN-128 references to GS1-128.
-05 Rev A 05/2009 Add custom defaults options; add ISSN EAN, Matrix 2 of 5, and Chinese 2 of 5 code
types; add ISBT concatenation parameters; change Dutch Postal references to
Netherlands KIX Code, 4State Postal to USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, and
Post US4 to UPU FICS Postal; add specific string search and new move cursor
options in ADF chapter.
-06 Rev A 10/2009 Add DS6708 with base model, add cable installation/removing instructions,
presentation mode bar code parameters and update technical specifications. Add
RS-232 parameters: Code 39 Full ASCII, PDF417, GS1 Databar 14/Limited/
Expanded.
iv Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table of Contents
Patents........................................................................................................................... ii
Warranty ........................................................................................................................ ii
Revision History............................................................................................................. iii
About This Guide
Introduction.................................................................................................................... xv
Configurations................................................................................................................ xv
Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................... xv
Notational Conventions.................................................................................................. xvi
Related Documents ....................................................................................................... xvii
Service Information........................................................................................................ xvii
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1
Supported Interfaces .................................................................................................... 1-2
Unpacking ..................................................................................................................... 1-2
Setting Up the Digital Scanner ...................................................................................... 1-3
Standard Model ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Model with Base ...................................................................................................... 1-5
Configuring the Digital Scanner .............................................................................. 1-6
Mounting the Digital Scanner ........................................................................................ 1-6
Desk Mount ............................................................................................................. 1-6
Wall Mount .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Chapter 2: Scanning
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 2-1
Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................ 2-2
LED Definitions ............................................................................................................. 2-4
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode ....................................................................................... 2-4
Scanning with the Digital Scanner .......................................................................... 2-4
Aiming .................................................................................................................... 2-5
vi Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning in Presentation Mode .................................................................................... 2-6
Scanning with the Digital Scanner in the Intellistand .............................................. 2-6
Scanning with the Digital Scanner with Base .......................................................... 2-7
Decode Zones .............................................................................................................. 2-8
Chapter 3: Maintenance & Technical Specifications
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 3-1
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 3-2
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 3-5
Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions .............................................................................. 3-7
Chapter 4: User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 4-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 4-2
Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 4-2
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ..................................... 4-2
User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................ 4-4
Parameter Scanning ............................................................................................... 4-5
Beeper Tone ........................................................................................................... 4-6
Beeper Volume ....................................................................................................... 4-7
Power Mode ............................................................................................................ 4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode ............................................................................. 4-8
Trigger Mode ........................................................................................................... 4-9
Picklist Mode ........................................................................................................... 4-10
Presentation Mode .................................................................................................. 4-11
Decode Session Timeout ........................................................................................ 4-13
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................ 4-13
Beep After Good Decode ........................................................................................ 4-14
Fuzzy 1D Processing .............................................................................................. 4-14
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) .............................................................. 4-15
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................. 4-16
Transmit Code ID Character ................................................................................... 4-16
Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................. 4-17
Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................ 4-18
FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................... 4-19
Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................. 4-20
Synapse Interface ................................................................................................... 4-21
Chapter 5: Decoding Preferences
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 5-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 5-2
Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 5-2
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults .................................................................. 5-2
Decoding Preferences .................................................................................................. 5-3
Decoding Illumination .............................................................................................. 5-3
Table of Contents vii
Illumination Bank Control ........................................................................................ 5-4
Decode Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................... 5-5
Low Light Enhancement ......................................................................................... 5-5
Presentation Mode Field of View ............................................................................ 5-6
Chapter 6: USB Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 6-1
Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................... 6-2
USB Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................. 6-3
USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................. 6-5
USB Device Type .................................................................................................... 6-5
USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes ..................................................... 6-6
USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 6-8
USB CAPS Lock Override ...................................................................................... 6-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................... 6-9
Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 6-9
Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero ........................................................................ 6-10
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution ............................................................................ 6-10
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 6-11
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 6-11
Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 6-12
ASCII Character Set for USB ........................................................................................ 6-13
Chapter 7: RS-232 Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7-1
Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................. 7-2
RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 7-4
RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 7-5
RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................. 7-7
Baud Rate ............................................................................................................... 7-8
Parity ....................................................................................................................... 7-10
Stop Bit Select ........................................................................................................ 7-11
Data Bits ................................................................................................................. 7-11
Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................. 7-12
Hardware Handshaking .......................................................................................... 7-12
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................ 7-14
Host Serial Response Time-out .............................................................................. 7-16
RTS Line State ........................................................................................................ 7-17
Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................... 7-17
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................ 7-18
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................... 7-19
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 7-19
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ................................................................................... 7-20
Chapter 8: IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 8-1
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................ 8-2
viii Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................... 8-3
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters ................................................................................. 8-4
Port Address ........................................................................................................... 8-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................. 8-5
Chapter 9: Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 9-1
Connecting Using Wand Emulation .............................................................................. 9-2
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults ........................................................................... 9-4
Wand Emulation Host Parameters ............................................................................... 9-5
Wand Emulation Host Types .................................................................................. 9-5
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) .................................................................................. 9-6
Polarity .................................................................................................................... 9-7
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 9-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 9-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII ............................................................................... 9-9
Chapter 10: Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 10-1
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................... 10-2
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 10-3
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................. 10-5
Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................. 10-5
Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes ................................................. 10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 10-8
Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................... 10-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 10-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................... 10-9
Caps Lock On ......................................................................................................... 10-10
Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................ 10-10
Convert Wedge Data .............................................................................................. 10-11
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 10-11
FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................... 10-12
Send Make and Break ............................................................................................ 10-12
Keyboard Maps ....................................................................................................... 10-13
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................... 10-15
Chapter 11: Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 11-1
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation .......................................................................... 11-2
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 11-4
Scanner Emulation Host ............................................................................................... 11-5
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters ...................................................................... 11-5
Parameter Pass-Through ........................................................................................ 11-6
Convert Newer Code Types .................................................................................... 11-7
Module Width .......................................................................................................... 11-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 11-8
Table of Contents ix
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 11-8
Transmission Timeout ............................................................................................. 11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 11-10
Leading Margin ....................................................................................................... 11-10
Check For Decode LED .......................................................................................... 11-11
Chapter 12: 123Scan
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12-1
Communication with 123Scan ...................................................................................... 12-1
123Scan Parameter ...................................................................................................... 12-1
Chapter 13: Symbologies
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ..................................................................................... 13-1
Errors While Scanning .................................................................................................. 13-2
Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................... 13-2
UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... 13-7
Enable/Disable UPC-A ............................................................................................ 13-7
Enable/Disable UPC-E ............................................................................................ 13-7
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 .......................................................................................... 13-8
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 ................................................................................. 13-8
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 ............................................................................. 13-9
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN ............................................................................... 13-9
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................. 13-10
User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................... 13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................ 13-13
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit .................................................................................. 13-14
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit .................................................................................. 13-14
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................ 13-15
UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................... 13-16
UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................... 13-17
UPC-E1 Preamble .................................................................................................. 13-18
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................... 13-19
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................... 13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend .............................................................................................. 13-20
Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................... 13-21
UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................. 13-22
ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................... 13-22
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... 13-23
Enable/Disable Code 128 ....................................................................................... 13-23
Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................... 13-23
Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ................................................ 13-25
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ........................................................................................ 13-25
ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................ 13-26
Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................... 13-27
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................... 13-27
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ 13-28
Enable/Disable Code 39 ......................................................................................... 13-28
x Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 ............................................................................ 13-28
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................. 13-29
Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................ 13-29
Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................... 13-30
Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 13-32
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................ 13-32
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 13-33
Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store ........................................................................... 13-33
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................ 13-36
Enable/Disable Code 93 ......................................................................................... 13-36
Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................... 13-36
Code 11 ........................................................................................................................ 13-38
Code 11 .................................................................................................................. 13-38
Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................... 13-38
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 13-40
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................. 13-41
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................. 13-41
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 13-41
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 13-42
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 13-44
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................... 13-44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................... 13-45
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................... 13-45
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 13-45
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................... 13-46
Codabar (NW - 7) ......................................................................................................... 13-48
Enable/Disable Codabar ......................................................................................... 13-48
Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................... 13-48
CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................ 13-50
NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................... 13-50
MSI ............................................................................................................................... 13-51
Enable/Disable MSI ................................................................................................ 13-51
Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................ 13-51
MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................... 13-53
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................... 13-53
MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................... 13-54
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................... 13-54
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 13-54
Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................. 13-55
Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 13-55
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................... 13-56
Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 13-57
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................... 13-57
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................... 13-58
Inverse 1D .................................................................................................................... 13-59
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................ 13-60
US Postnet .............................................................................................................. 13-60
US Planet ................................................................................................................ 13-60
Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 13-61
UK Postal ................................................................................................................ 13-61
Table of Contents xi
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................. 13-62
Japan Postal ........................................................................................................... 13-62
Australian Postal ..................................................................................................... 13-63
Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................... 13-63
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................... 13-64
UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................... 13-64
GS1 DataBar (formerly Reduced Space Symbology) ................................................... 13-65
GS1 DataBar-14 ..................................................................................................... 13-65
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................. 13-65
GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................... 13-66
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN ........................................................................ 13-66
Composite ..................................................................................................................... 13-67
Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................... 13-67
Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................. 13-67
Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................. 13-68
UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................ 13-68
Composite Beep Mode ........................................................................................... 13-69
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for GS1 Composite Codes (formerly
UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes) ............... 13-69
2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................ 13-70
Enable/Disable PDF417 .......................................................................................... 13-70
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417 ................................................................................. 13-70
Code 128 Emulation ............................................................................................... 13-71
Data Matrix .............................................................................................................. 13-72
Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................. 13-72
Maxicode ................................................................................................................. 13-73
QR Code ................................................................................................................. 13-74
QR Inverse .............................................................................................................. 13-74
MicroQR .................................................................................................................. 13-75
Aztec ....................................................................................................................... 13-75
Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................... 13-76
Redundancy Level ........................................................................................................ 13-77
Redundancy Level 1 ............................................................................................... 13-77
Redundancy Level 2 ............................................................................................... 13-77
Redundancy Level 3 ............................................................................................... 13-77
Redundancy Level 4 ............................................................................................... 13-78
Security Level ............................................................................................................... 13-79
Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................... 13-80
Report Version .............................................................................................................. 13-80
Macro PDF Features .................................................................................................... 13-81
Flush Macro Buffer .................................................................................................. 13-81
Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................... 13-81
Chapter 14: Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL)
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 14-1
Driver’s License Parsing ............................................................................................... 14-2
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ............... 14-3
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes ................................................................. 14-3
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) .............................................. 14-4
xii Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes .............................................................................. 14-6
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued) ........................................................... 14-7
Parsing Rule Example .................................................................................................. 14-16
Field Update Procedure ................................................................................................ 14-20
User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 14-21
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................ 14-21
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................... 14-21
Chapter 15: Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 15-1
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions ................................................................................... 15-1
Using ADF Bar Codes .................................................................................................. 15-2
ADF Bar Code Menu Example ..................................................................................... 15-2
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule .................................................................... 15-3
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule ............................................................................ 15-3
Alternate Rule Sets ................................................................................................. 15-3
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) .............................................................................. 15-4
Default Rules .......................................................................................................... 15-5
ADF Bar Codes ............................................................................................................. 15-5
Special Commands ....................................................................................................... 15-7
Pause Duration ....................................................................................................... 15-7
Begin New Rule ...................................................................................................... 15-7
Save Rule ............................................................................................................... 15-8
Erase ....................................................................................................................... 15-8
Quit Entering Rules ................................................................................................. 15-8
Disable Rule Set ..................................................................................................... 15-9
Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 15-10
Code Types ............................................................................................................. 15-10
Code Lengths .......................................................................................................... 15-17
Message Containing A Specific Data String ........................................................... 15-21
Actions .......................................................................................................................... 15-26
Send Data ............................................................................................................... 15-26
Setup Field(s) .......................................................................................................... 15-30
Modify Data ............................................................................................................. 15-37
Pad Data with Spaces ............................................................................................. 15-38
Pad Data with Zeros ............................................................................................... 15-42
Beeps ...................................................................................................................... 15-47
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................... 15-47
Send Right Control Key .......................................................................................... 15-83
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters ...................................................... 15-84
Turn On/Off Rule Sets ............................................................................................ 15-89
Alphanumeric Keyboard ............................................................................................... 15-91
Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters
Table of Contents xiii
Appendix B: Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................ B-1
AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................... B-3
Appendix C: Sample Bar Codes
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ C-1
UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... C-1
UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................... C-1
EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................ C-2
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... C-2
Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................... C-2
GS1 DataBar-14 ........................................................................................................... C-3
PDF417 ......................................................................................................................... C-3
Data Matrix ................................................................................................................... C-3
Maxicode ...................................................................................................................... C-4
QR Code ....................................................................................................................... C-4
US Postnet .................................................................................................................... C-4
UK Postal ...................................................................................................................... C-4
Appendix D: Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes ...................................................................................................... D-1
Cancel ........................................................................................................................... D-2
Appendix E: ASCII Character Sets
Glossary
Index
Tell Us What You Think...
xiv Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
About This Guide
Introduction
The Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up,
operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the Symbol DS6708 digital scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes all operating features of the Symbol DS6708 Standard Range digital scanner.
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection
information.
•
Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the
digital scanner in hand-held and presentation (hands-free) modes.
•
Chapter 3, Maintenance & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital
scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
•
Chapter 4, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options describes features frequently used to
customize how data transmits to the host device and programming bar codes for selecting user preference
features for the digital scanner.
•
Chapter 5, Decoding Preferences provides decoding preference features and programming bar codes for
selecting these features.
•
Chapter 6, USB Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host.
•
Chapter 8, IBM 468X / 469X Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS
systems.
NOTE The Symbol DS6708 premier digital decoder does not support imaging. For imaging features and
parameters, refer to the Symbol DS6707 Digital Imager Scanner Product Reference Guide, p/n 72E-83978-xx.
xvi Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
•
Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host, such as
point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.
•
Chapter 9, Wand Emulation Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with a Wand Emulation
host.
•
Chapter 10, Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital
scanner.
•
Chapter 11, Scanner Emulation Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an Undecoded
Scanner Emulation host.
•
Chapter 12, 123Scan describes the 123Scan PC-based scanner configuration tool, and provides the bar
code to scan to communicate with the 123Scan program.
•
Chapter 13, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming bar codes for
selecting these features for the digital scanner.
•
Chapter 14, Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) describes how to program the digital scanner to read and
utilize the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
•
Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting
to the host.
•
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner
defaults.
•
Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions,
and keyboard maps.
•
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes of various code types.
•
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific
numeric values.
•
Appendix E, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
•
Italics are used to highlight the following:
•Chapters and sections in this and related documents
•Dialog box, window and screen names
•Drop-down list and list box names
•Check box and radio button names
•
Bold text is used to highlight the following:
•Key names on a keypad
•Button names on a screen.
•
bullets (•) indicate:
•Action items
•Lists of alternatives
•Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential
About This Guide xvii
•
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
•
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.
Related Documents
The Symbol DS6708 Quick Start Guide, p/n 72-83973-xx, provides general information for getting started with the
Symbol DS6708 digital scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
The latest version of this guide and all Symbol guides are available at:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/manuals.
If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility support for your region. Contact
information is available at: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support.
When contacting Enterprise Mobility support, please have the following information available:
•
Serial number of the unit
•
Model number or product name
•
Software type and version number
Motorola responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support, you may need to return your equipment
for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during
shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the
warranty.
If you purchased your Enterprise Mobility business product from a Motorola business partner, please contact that
business partner for support.
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
xviii Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Introduction
The Symbol DS6708 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning and sub-second image
capture. With support for a variety of commonly used interfaces, the DS6708 provides the best value in a digital
scanner. Whether in hand-held mode or presentation mode, the digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of use
for extended periods of time.
Figure 1-1
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner
Figure 1-2
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner with Base
Scan Window
Trigger
LED
Beeper
Base
Angle Adjustment
Knob (2)
1 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Supported Interfaces
The DS 6708 digital scanner supports:
•
USB connection to a host. The digital scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard
interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface
supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German,
French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
•
Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner
with the IBM terminal.
•
Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the digital
scanner with the host.
•
Wand Emulation connection to a host. The digital scanner connects to a portable data terminal, a controller,
or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it.
•
Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface
supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German,
French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
•
Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The digital scanner connects to a portable data terminal or a
controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host.
•
Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse
adapter cable. The digital scanner autodetects the host.
•
Configuration via 123Scan.
Unpacking
Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the digital scanner was damaged in
transit, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xvii for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING.
It is the approved shipping container; use this to return the equipment for servicing.
Getting Started 1 - 3
Setting Up the Digital Scanner
Standard Model
Installing the Interface Cable
1. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle
(see Figure 1-3).
2. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is secure.
3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host
connections).
Figure 1-3
Installing the Cable
Removing the Interface Cable
1. Using the tip of a screwdriver, depress the cable’s modular connector clip.
Figure 1-4
Removing the Cable
2. Carefully slide out the cable.
3. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable to connect a new cable.
Clip
To host
Cable interface port
Interface cable modular
connector
NOTE Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.
Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.
1 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface (Symbol DS6708 0nly)
Synapse Smart Cables enable interfacing to a variety of hosts. The Synapse cable has built-in intelligence to
detect that host.
Figure 1-5
Synapse Cable Connection
1. Plug the Synapse adapter cable (p/n 25-32463-xx) into the bottom of the digital scanner, as described in
Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3.
2. Align the ‘S’ on the Synapse adapter cable with the ‘S’ on the Synapse Smart Cable and plug the cable in.
3. Connect the other end of the Synapse Smart Cable to the host.
Connecting Power (if required)
If the host does not provide power to the digital scanner, connect an external power supply to the digital scanner:
1. Connect the interface cable to the bottom of the digital scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable
on page 1-3.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into
an AC outlet.
NOTE Refer to the Synapse Interface Guide provided with the Synapse cable for detailed setup instructions.
Synapse Adapter Cable
To digital scanner
Synapse
Smart Cable
To host
Getting Started 1 - 5
Model with Base
Installing the Interface Cable
1. Turn both angle adjustment knobs left to loosen the scanner in the base. See Figure 1-6.
2. Move the scanner forward until there is full access to the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner. See
Figure 1-3 or Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-6
Adjust the Scanner for Cable Installation
3. Insert the interface cable through the opening at the back of the base.
4. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle.
5. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured.
6. Move the scanner to preferred angle and turn the angle adjustment knobs right to tighten.
7. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
Removing the Interface Cable for Scanner with Base
1. Turn both angle adjustment knobs left to loosen the scanner in the base. See Figure 1-6.
2. Move the scanner forward until there is full access to the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner.
3. Using the tip of a screwdriver, depress the cable’s modular connector clip. See Figure 1-4.
4. Carefully slide out the cable.
5. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable to connect a new cable.
6. Move the scanner to preferred angle and turn the angle adjustment knobs right to tighten.
Angle Adjustment Knob (2)
NOTE Ensure the cable is inserted through the opening at the back and not underneath the base.
NOTE Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.
Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.
1 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Configuring the Digital Scanner
To configure the digital scanner, use the bar codes included in this manual, or the 123Scan configuration program.
See Chapter 4, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options and Chapter 5, Decoding Preferences
for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-specific chapter
to set up connection to a specific host type.
See Chapter 12, 123Scan to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program. The program includes
a help file.
Mounting the Digital Scanner
Desk Mount
Use the optional desk mount for convenient and protective placement of the digital scanner on a flat surface.
Simply place the mount on the surface. The rubber feet hold the mount securely in place when inserting and
removing the digital scanner.
Figure 1-7
Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Desk Mount
You can secure the desk mount to a desk surface by inserting two screws* appropriate for the mounting surface
through the screw holes of the desk mount, and into the surface. Screw the desk mount onto the surface with or
without the rubber feet.
*The recommended screws are two #6 screws (5/8” long).
Getting Started 1 - 7
Wall Mount
To use the optional wall mount to mount the digital scanner on a wall, place the mount in the desired location on the
wall and secure by inserting two screws* appropriate for the mounting surface through the screw holes on the
mount, and into the surface. Insert the digital scanner into the mount as shown.
Figure 1-8
Securing the Wall Mount
*The recommended screws are two #6 screws (1” long) and two #6 washers.
For convenience, print this page and use the template below for mounting hole locations.
Figure 1-9
Wall Mounting Template
2.98”
Insert mounting
screw Insert mounting
screw
1 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 2 Scanning
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions
and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.
2 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Beeper Definitions
The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep
sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner.
Table 2-1
Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence Indication
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps Power up.
Short high beep A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).
4 long low beeps A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This
occurs if the digital scanner is not properly configured. Check option setting.
5 low beeps Conversion or format error.
Low/high/low beeps ADF transmit error. See
Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting
.
High/high/high/low beeps RS-232 receive error.
Parameter Menu Scanning
Low/high/low/high beeps Out of host parameter storage space. Scan
Set Default Parameter on page 4-4
.
Short high beep Correct entry scanned or correct menu sequence performed.
Low/high beeps Input error; incorrect bar code, programming sequence, or
Cancel
scanned;
remain in ADF program mode.
High/low beeps Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using numeric bar codes.
High/low/high/low beeps Successful program exit with change in parameter setting.
Code 39 Buffering
High/low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer.
3 long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full.
Low/high/low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an
empty buffer.
Low/high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data.
Macro PDF
2 long low beeps File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
3 long low beeps Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF
symbol.
4 long low beeps Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a MPDF sequence, a duplicate
MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal
MPDF field.
5 long low beeps Flushing MPDF buffer.
Scanning 2 - 3
Fast warble beep Aborting MPDF sequence.
Low/high beeps Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
ADF Programming: Normal Data Entry. Duration of tones are short.
High/low beeps Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Low/low beeps Enter another alphabetic character or scan the
End of Message
bar code.
High/high beeps Enter another criterion or action, or scan the
Save Rule
bar code.
High/low/high/low beeps Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
High/low/low beeps All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
Low beep Delete last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
Low/high/high beeps All rules are deleted.
ADF Programming: Error Indications. Duration of tones are very long.
Low/high/low/high beeps Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again. (It is not
necessary to re-enter the current rule.)
Low/high/low beeps Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to
exit rule entry.
Low/high beeps Entry error, wrong bar code scanned. Re-enter criterion or action. All previously
entered criteria and actions are retained. Criteria or action list is too long for a rule.
Host Specific
USB only
4 short high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan
again.
Low/medium/high beeps
upon scanning a USB device
type
Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanner can
operate at the highest power level.
Low/medium/high beeps
occur more than once. The USB bus can put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital
scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens
when the PC cold boots.
RS-232 only
1 short high beep A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled.
Table 2-1
Beeper Definitions (Continued)
Beeper Sequence Indication
2 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
LED Definitions
In addition to beep sequences, the digital scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status. Table 2-2 defines LED
colors that display during scanning.
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
Install and program the digital scanner (see Setting Up the Digital Scanner on page 1-3). For assistance, contact
the local supplier or Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support.
Scanning with the Digital Scanner
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see the appropriate host chapter.)
2. Aim the digital scanner at the bar code.
Figure 2-10
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
3. When the digital scanner senses movement, in its default Auto Aim trigger mode, it projects a red laser aiming
pattern which allows positioning the bar code or object within the field of view. (To turn off the default Auto Aim
trigger mode, see Trigger Mode on page 4-9.)
Figure 2-11
Laser Aiming Pattern
If necessary, the digital scanner turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code.
Table 2-2
Standard LED Definitions
LED Indication
Off No power is applied to the digital scanner, or the digital scanner is on and ready to scan.
Green A bar code was successfully decoded.
Red A data transmission error or digital scanner malfunction occurred.
Scanning 2 - 5
4. Center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern. Be sure the entire symbol is within the
rectangular area formed by the brackets in the pattern.
Figure 2-12
Centering Symbol in Aiming Pattern
5. Hold the trigger until the digital scanner beeps, indicating the bar code is successfully decoded. For more
information on beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
This process usually occurs instantaneously. Steps 2 - 4 are repeated on poor quality or difficult bar codes, until the
bar code decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout occurs.
Aiming
Hold the digital scanner between two and nine inches (depending on symbol density; see Decode Zones on page
2-8) from the symbol, centering the aiming pattern cross hairs on the symbol.
The aiming pattern is smaller when the digital scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the
symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the digital scanner, and those with larger
bars or elements (mil size) farther from the digital scanner.
The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered. The top
examples in Figure 2-13 show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 2-13
Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming
Linear bar code PDF417 symbol
Symbol
Aiming Pattern
012345
012345
012345
012345
2 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning in Presentation Mode
Scanning with the Digital Scanner in the Intellistand
The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When you place the digital scanner in the
stand’s “cup,” the digital scanner’s built-in sensor places the digital scanner in presentation mode. When you
remove the digital scanner from the stand it operates in its normal hand-held mode.
Figure 2-14
Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Intellistand
To operate the digital scanner in the IntelliStand:
1. Connect the digital scanner to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections).
2. Insert the digital scanner in the Intellistand by placing the front of the digital scanner into the stand’s “cup” (see
Figure 2-14).
3. Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the digital scanner.
4. Center the symbol in the aiming pattern. The entire symbol must be within the brackets.
5. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information on beeper
and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
Scanner
Holder (Cup)
Angle Adjustment Knob
Height Adjustment Knob
Scanning 2 - 7
Scanning with the Digital Scanner with Base
The DS6707 digital scanner with base (DS670X-SR2000XNSR) offers the flexibility of switching between
presentation (hands-free) mode and hand-held mode. The default mode is presentation mode.
Figure 2-15
Scanning in Presentation Mode
Scanning with the Digital Scanner
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see the appropriate host chapter).
2. Use the base adjustment knobs to adjust the angle of the digital scanner.
3. Center the symbol in the aiming pattern. The entire symbol must be within the brackets.
4. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information on beeper
and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
Switching to Hand-Held Mode
1. Lift the scanner for hand-held use.
2. Center the symbol in the aiming pattern. The entire symbol must be within the brackets.
3. Pull the trigger. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more
information on beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
4. The digital scanner automatically reverts back to presentation mode after a predetermined time delay. The
default is 3 seconds. (To change the time delay settings, see Presentation Mode on page 4-11.)
2 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decode Zones
Figure 2-16
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Decode Zone for 1D Bar Codes
In .
cm
0
0
DS6708
5 mil (Code 39)
5.4
13 mil (100% UPC/EAN)
8.4
12.9
0
5
5
In . cm
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
10
10
0
12.7
12.7
25.4
31.6
0.9
20 mil (Code 39)
Note: Typical performance at 73.4 F (23 C)
on high quality symbols.
Depth of Field
5
12.7
10
25.4
15
38.1
0.9
0.9
OO
Postnet 12.5
2.6
10 mil I 2 of 5 7.9
1.0
Scanning 2 - 9
Figure 2-17
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Decode Zone for 2D Bar Codes
In .
cm
0
0
6.2
7.50
0
5
5
In . cm
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
10
10
0
12.7
12.7
25.4
31.6
PDF417 (10 mil)
Datamatrix (10 mil)
Note: Typical performance at 73.4 F (23 C)
on high quality symbols.
Depth of Field
5
12.7
10
25.4
15
38.1
OO
1.4
1.10
35 mil Maxicode 12.8
1.5
10 mil MicroPDF
7.50
2.3
10 mil QR Code
6.6 mil PDF417
2.6 6.8
1.4 5.2
DS6708
2 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 3 Maintenance & Technical
Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal
descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Cleaning the scan window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window can affect scanning accuracy.
•
Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window.
•
Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
•
Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
•
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.
3 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Troubleshooting
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
The aiming pattern does not
appear when pressing the
trigger.
No power to the digital scanner. If the configuration requires a power
supply, re-connect the power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is used. Connect the correct host interface
cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.
Digital scanner is disabled. For Synapse or IBM 468x mode,
enable the digital scanner via the host
interface. Otherwise, see the technical
person in charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, CTS
is not asserted. Assert CTS line.
Aiming pattern is disabled. Enable the aiming pattern. See
Decode
Aiming Pattern on page 5-5
.
Scanner emits short low/short
medium/short high beep
sequence (power-up beep
sequence) more than once.
The USB bus may put the digital
scanner in a state where power to the
digital scanner is cycled on and off
more than once.
Normal during host reset.
Digital scanner emits aiming
pattern, but does not decode the
bar code.
Digital scanner is not programmed for
the correct bar code type. Program the digital scanner to read that
type of bar code. See
Chapter 13,
Symbologies
.
Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar
code type to determine if the bar code
is defaced.
The symbol is not completely inside
aiming pattern. Move the symbol completely within the
aiming pattern.
Digital scanner emits 4 short
high beeps during decode
attempt.
Digital scanner has not completed
USB initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 3
Digital scanner decodes bar
code, but does not transmit the
data to the host.
Digital scanner is not programmed for
the correct host type. Scan the appropriate host type
programming bar code. See the
chapter corresponding to the host type.
Interface cable is loose. Re-connect the cable.
If 4 long low beeps are heard, a
transmission error occurred. Set the digital scanner's
communication parameters to match
the host's setting.
If 5 low beeps are heard, a conversion
or format error occurred. Configure the digital scanner's
conversion parameters properly.
If low/high/low beeps are heard, an
invalid ADF rule is detected. Program the correct ADF rules.
If high/low beeps are heard, the digital
scanner is buffering Code 39 data. Normal scanning a Code 39 bar code
and the Code 39 Buffering option is
enabled.
Host displays scanned data
incorrectly. Digital scanner is not programmed to
work with the host. Scan the appropriate host type
programming bar code.
For RS-232, set the digital scanner's
communication parameters to match
the host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration,
program the system for the correct
keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS
LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options
(e.g., UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Digital scanner emits
high/high/high/low beeps when
not in use.
RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise,
set the digital scanner's RS-232 parity
to match the host setting.
Digital scanner emits low/high
beeps during programming. Input error or
Cancel
bar code was
scanned. Scan the correct numeric bar codes
within range for the parameter
programmed.
Digital scanner emits
low/high/low/high beeps during
programming.
Out of ADF parameter storage space. Erase all rules and re-program with
shorter rules.
The digital scanner may be out of
Synapse parameter storage space. Scan
Set Synapse Defaults
bar code
for cables no longer in use and
re-program the digital scanner for the
current host interface.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
3 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Digital scanner emits
low/high/low beeps. Clearing Code 39 buffer. Normal when scanning the Code 39
Buffering
Clear Buffer
bar code or
upon attempt to transmit an empty
Code 39 buffer.
Digital scanner emits a
power-up beep after changing
USB host type.
The USB bus re-established power to
the digital scanner. Normal when changing USB host type.
Digital scanner emits one high
beep when not in use. In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> character
was received and Beep on <BEL>
option is enabled.
Normal when
Beep on <BEL>
is
enabled and the digital scanner is in
RS-232 mode.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
NOTE If after performing these checks the digital scanner still experiences problems, contact the distributor or
call Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xvii for the telephone numbers.
Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 5
Technical Specifications
Table 3-2
Technical Specifications
Item Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
(For Scanner Only; Not
Including Base)
6.55 in. x 4.72 in. x 2.82 in. (16.6 cm x 11.9 cm x 7.1 cm)
(H x L x W)
Weight: 6.4 oz. (182 gm)
Voltage & Current: 5 +/-10%VDC @ 350 mA
Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black
Performance Characteristics
Light Source Aiming: 650 nm laser diode
Illumination: 630 nm LED
Field of View
(Vertical x Horizontal)
34º (V) x 43º (H)
Roll
Pitch
Yaw
360º
+/- 65º
+/- 60º
Symbology Decode Capability
1D UPC/EAN and with supplementals, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Tri-optic Code 39,
GS1 DataBar Variants (formerly RSS), GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128), Code
128, Code 128 Full ASCII, Code 93, Codabar (NW1), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2
of 5, MSI, Code 11, IATA, Bookland EAN, Code 32
PDF417 (& Variants) PDF417, MicroPDF417, Composite Codes
Postal U.S. Postnet and Planet, U.K., Japan, Australian, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS
4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, UPU FICS Postal
2D MaxiCode, Data Matrix (ECC 200), QR Code, Micro QR, Aztec
3 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Typical Working Distance 5 mil (Code 39): 0.9 - 5.4 in. (2.3 - 13.7 cm)
10 mil (I 2 of 5): 1.0 - 7.9 in. (2.5 - 20.1 cm)
13 mil (100% UPC/EAN): 0.9 - 8.4 in. (2.3 - 21.3 cm)
Postnet 2.6 - 12.5 in. (6.6 - 31.8 cm)
20 mil (Code 39): 0.9 - 12.9 in. (2.3 - 32.8 cm)
PDF417 (6.6 Mil): 3.4 - 5.7 in. (8.6 - 14.5 cm)
QR Code (10 Mil) 2.6 - 6.8 in. (6.6 - 17.3 cm)
PDF417 (10 Mil): 1.4 - 6.2 in. (3.6 - 15.7 cm)
MicroPDF (10 Mil) 2.3 - 7.5 in. (5.8 - 19.1 cm)
Data Matrix (10 Mil): 1.1 - 7.5 in. (2.8 - 19.1 cm)
Maxicode (35 Mil): 1.5 - 12.8 in. (3.8 - 32.5 cm)
Print Contrast 25% minimum reflectance
Motion Tolerances Horizontal Velocity: 5 in. (12.7 cm) per second
Interfaces Supported RS-232C (Standard, Nixdorf, ICL, & Fujitsu); USB (Standard, IBM SurePOS,
Macintosh); IBM 468x/469x; Keyboard Wedge; and, Synapse Connectivity allows
for connectivity to all of the above plus many non-standard interfaces.
User Environment
Operating Temperature 32º F to 104º F (0º C to 40º C)
Storage Temperature -40º F to 158º F (-40º C to 70º C)
Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Drop Specifications
(For Scanner Only; Not
Including Base)
Withstands multiple 5 ft. (1.52 m) drops to concrete at operating temperature
extremes, and multiple 6 ft. (1.8 m) drops to concrete at room temperature (23º C).
Ambient Light Immunity Immune to normal artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct sunlight) lighting.
Regulatory
Electrical Safety UL6950-1, CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1, EN60950-1 / IEC60950-1
Laser Safety EN60825-1:1994 +A1: 2002 +A2 :2001, IEC60825-1, 21CFR1040.10 and
21CFR1040.11, CDRH Class II, IEC Class 2
EMI/RFI FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B, CISPR 22, CISPR 24
Medical Electrical Equipment: EN60601-1-2: 2002
RoHS Compliance with RoHS Directive 2002/95/EEC
Mounting Options
(Accessories) Intellistand with adjustable height: 5-10 in. (12.7-25.4 cm) and
adjustable angle: 0º - 90º
Desktop & Wall-mount holders are also available.
Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over the host
cable.
Table 3-2
Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item Description
Maintenance & Technical Specifications 3 - 7
Digital Scanner Signal Descriptions
Figure 3-1
Digital Scanner Cable Pinouts
The signal descriptions in Table 3-3 apply to the connectors on the Symbol DS6708 digital scanner and are for
reference only.
Pin 10
Bottom of digital scanner
Pin 1
Interface cable
modular connector
Cable interface port
Table 3-3
Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin IBM Synapse RS-232 Keyboard
Wedge Wand USB Scanner
Emulation
1
Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 DBP
2
Power Power Power Power Power Power Power
3
Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
4
IBM_A(+) Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved SOS
5
Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D + Decode
6
IBM_B(-) SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 Trigger
7
Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D - Enable
8
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
9
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
10
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
3 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 4 User Preferences & Miscellaneous
Digital Scanner Options
Introduction
You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter
describes each user preference feature and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.
The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 4-1 on page 4-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default
Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is
not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
If not using a USB cable or Synapse cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information)
after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4. Throughout the programming
bar code menus, asterisks indicate (*)default values.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
*High Volume
(00h) Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
4 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan
the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 4-6. The digital scanner issues a
fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Serial Response Time-Out or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several
bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults
Table 4-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. There are two ways to change the default values:
•
Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4.
•
Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program (see Chapter 12, 123Scan).
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 4-1
User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter Restore Defaults 4-4
Parameter Scanning ECh Enable 4-5
Beeper Tone 91h Medium 4-6
Beeper Volume 8Ch High 4-7
Power Mode 80h Continuous On 4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 92h 1 Minute 4-8
Trigger Mode 8Ah Auto Aim 4-9
Picklist Mode F0h 92h Disabled Always 4-10
Presentation Mode F1h, 74h 3 Sec 4-11
Decode Session Timeout 88h 9.9 Sec 4-13
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 89h 0.6 Sec 4-13
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 3
Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 4-14
Fuzzy 1D Processing F1h, 02h Enable 4-14
Decode Mirror Images F1h, 19h Never 4-15
Miscellaneous Options
Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 4-16
Prefix Value 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 4-17
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value
62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF> 4-17
Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 4-18
FN1 Substitution Values 67h, 6Dh Set 4-19
Transmit “No Read” Message 5Eh Disable 4-20
Synapse Interface F0h, ACh Standard Synapse
Connection 4-21
Table 4-1
User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
4 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on page A-1.
You can reset the digital scanner to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate
bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and/or set its current settings as custom defaults.
•
Restore Defaults - Scan this bar code to reset all default parameters as follows.
•If you previously set custom defaults by scanning Write to Custom Defaults, scan Restore Defaults to
retrieve and restore the decoder’s custom default settings.
•If you did not set custom defaults, scan Restore Defaults to restore the factory default values listed in
Table A-1.
•
Set Factory Defaults - Scan this bar code to restore the factory default values listed in Table A-1. This
deletes any custom defaults set.
•
Write to Custom Defaults - Scan this bar code to set the current decoder settings as custom defaults. Once
set, you can recover custom default settings by scanning Restore Defaults.
*Restore Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 5
Parameter Scanning
Parameter # ECh
To disable decoding of parameter bar codes, including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes, scan the Disable
Parameter Scanning bar code below. To re-enable decoding of parameter bar codes, scan Enable Parameter
Scanning.
*Enable Parameter Scanning
(01h)
Disable Parameter Scanning
(00h)
4 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Beeper Tone
Parameter # 91h
To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency, or High Frequency bar
code.
Low Frequency
(02h)
*Medium Frequency
(Optimum Setting)
(01h)
High Frequency
(00h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 7
Beeper Volume
Parameter # 8Ch
To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code.
Power Mode
Parameter # 80h
This parameter determines whether or not power remains on after a decode attempt. In reduced power mode, the
digital scanner enters into a low power consumption mode to preserve battery life after each decode attempt. In
continuous power mode, power remains on after each decode attempt.
Low Volume
(02h)
Medium Volume
(01h)
*High Volume
(00h)
*Continuous On
(00h)
Reduced Power Mode
(01h)
4 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Parameter # 92h
This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active after decoding. The digital scanner wakes upon
trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate with the digital scanner.
NOTE This parameter only applies when Power Mode is set to Reduced Power.
1 Second
(11h)
5 Seconds
(15h)
*1 Minute
(21h)
5 Minutes
(25h)
15 Minutes
(2Bh)
1 Hour
(31h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 9
Trigger Mode
Parameter # 8Ah
Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner:
•
Level - A trigger pull activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes,
you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout occurs.
•
Blink - This trigger mode is used in presentation (scanstand) mode. The digital scanner activates decode
processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view. Decoding range is reduced in this mode.
•
Auto Aim - This trigger mode turns on the red laser aiming pattern when the digital scanner senses motion.
A trigger pull activates decode processing. After 2 seconds of inactivity the red laser aiming pattern
automatically shuts off.
Level
(00h)
Blink
(07h)
*Auto Aim
(09h)
4 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Picklist Mode
Parameter # F0h 92h
Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair.
Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner:
•
Disabled Always - Picklist mode is always disabled.
•
Enabled Out of Scanstand - Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is out of presentation mode
and disabled when the digital scanner is in presentation mode.
•
Enabled Always - Picklist mode is always enabled.
*Disabled Always
(00h)
Enabled Out of Scanstand
(01h)
Enabled Always
(02h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 11
Presentation Mode
Parameter # F1h, 74h
This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains in hand-held mode before reverting back to the default
presentation (hands-free) mode.
Scanning Disable enables hand-held mode. To re-enable presentation (hands-free) mode, scan the desired time
delay bar code.
Disable
1 Sec
2 Sec
3 Sec
4 Sec
5 Sec
6 Sec
4 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Presentation Mode (continued)
7 Sec
8 Sec
9 Sec
10 Sec
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 13
Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in
0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.
To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For
example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the 0 and 5 bar
codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Parameter # 89h
Use this option in presentation (scanstand) mode to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol
is left in the digital scanner’s field of view. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds.
The default interval is 0.6 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar
codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Decode Session Timeout
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
4 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Beep After Good Decode
Parameter # 38h
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode. If selecting Do Not
Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error
conditions.
Fuzzy 1D Processing
Parameter # F1h 02h
This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes, including damaged and poor
quality symbols. Disable this only if you experience time delays when decoding 2D bar codes, or in detecting a no
decode.
*Beep After Good Decode
(Enable)
(01h)
Do Not Beep After Good Decode
(Disable)
(00h)
*Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing
(01h)
Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing
(00h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 15
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only)
Parameter # F1h 19h
Select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes:
•
Always - decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images
•
Never - do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images
•
Auto - decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.
*Never
(00h)
Always
(01h)
Auto
(02h)
4 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when decoding more than one
code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between
the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters,
see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-3.
NOTE If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”
Message on page 4-20, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character
(02h)
AIM Code ID Character
(01h)
*None
(00h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 17
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or
suffix, scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that
value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes.
When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit
decimal value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes.
To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
NOTE To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 4-18.
Scan Prefix
(07h)
Scan Suffix 1
(06h)
Scan Suffix 2
(08h)
Data Format Cancel
4 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scan Data Transmission Format
Parameter # EBh
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-17.
NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
*Data As Is
(00h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(01h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(02h)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(03h)
<PREFIX> <DATA >
(04h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 19
FN1 Substitution Values
Key Category Parameter # 67h
Decimal Value Parameter # 6Dh
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any FN1
character (0x1b) in a GS1-128 bar code with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key).
When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the
3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:
1. Scan the bar code below.
2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host
interface. Enter the 4-digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 4-19.
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(05h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(06h)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(07h)
Set FN1 Substitution Value
4 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit “No Read” Message
Parameter # 5Eh
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. Enable this to transmit the
characters NR when a bar code does not decoded. Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not
decode.
NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character
for Transmit Code ID Character on page 4-16, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR
message.
Enable No Read
(01h)
*Disable No Read
(00h)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 4 - 21
Synapse Interface
Parameter # F0h, ACh
The auto-detection of a Synapse cable varies in duration depending on the type of Synapse connection. If you
connected a digital scanner to another scanner using a Synapse cable, use the Auxiliary Synapse Port connection.
In all other cases, when using the cable, the default setting is recommended.
To disconnect and reconnect the digital scanner from a Synapse cable that is connected to a live host via a
Synapse, use the “Plug and Play" setting. Do not change this setting from the default if an on-board wedge host is
enabled.
*Standard Synapse Connection
(01h)
Auxiliary Synapse Port Connection
(32h)
“Plug and Play” Synapse Connection
(0Ah)
4 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 5 Decoding Preferences
Introduction
You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter
describes decoding preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.
The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 5-2
(also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default
values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down.
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up
beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4. Throughout the programming
bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
Feature/Option
* Indicates Default *Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h)
5 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to disable the decode aiming pattern,
scan the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern bar code listed under Decode Aiming Pattern on page 5-5. The digital
scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 5-1 lists the defaults for decoding preferences parameters. There are two ways to change the default values:
•
Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4.
•
Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program (see Chapter 12, 123Scan).
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 5-1
Decoding Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
Decoding Options
Decoding Illumination F0h 2Ah Enable 5-3
Illumination Bank Control F1h 3Bh Full Illumination 5-4
Decode Aiming Pattern F0h 32h Enable 5-5
Low Light Enhancement F1h 64h Disable 5-5
Presentation Mode Field of View F1h 61h Default (Reduced) 5-6
Decoding Preferences 5 - 3
Decoding Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control bar code decoding characteristics.
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # F0h, 2Ah
Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding. Select
Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination.
Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the
distance to the target increases.
*Enable Decoding Illumination
(01h)
Disable Decoding Illumination
(00h)
5 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Illumination Bank Control
Parameter # F1h 3Bh
Select an illumination bank control parameter to control the illumination banks on the scan engine.
•
Full (0) (default): Enable the full illumination system.
•
Auto (1): The illumination system automatically switches from left to right banks.
•
Left (2): The left bank is enabled.
•
Right (3): The right bank is enabled.
*Full Illumination
(00h)
Auto Illumination
(01h)
Left Illumination
(02h)
Right Illumination
(03h)
Decoding Preferences 5 - 5
Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # F0h, 32h
This parameter only applies in Decode Mode. Select Enable Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern
during bar code capture, or Disable Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off.
Low Light Enhancement
Parameter # F1h, 64h
In Scanstand mode, selecting Enable Low Light Enhancement causes illumination to remain on at a low level in
low lighting conditions. Select Disable Low Light Enhancement to prevent illumination from remaining on under
these conditions.
NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 4-10 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode
Aiming Pattern is disabled.
*Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
(02h)
Disable Decode Aiming Pattern
(00h)
Enable Low Light Enhancement
(01h)
*Disable Low Light Enhancement
(00h)
5 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Presentation Mode Field of View
Parameter # F1h, 61h
In presentation mode, the digital scanner searches for a bar code in a smaller region around the aiming pattern’s
center cross to speed search time.
To use a full field of view, scan Presentation Mode Full Field of View. This allows the digital scanner to search the
larger area of the aiming pattern.
*Presentation Mode Default Field of View
(01h)
Presentation Mode Full Field of View
(02h)
Chapter 6 USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host. The digital scanner connects directly to a
USB host, or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option
*Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
6 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 6-1
USB Connection
Figure 6-2
USB Connection for Scanner with Base
The digital scanner connects with USB-capable hosts including:
•
Desktop PCs and notebooks
•Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only)
•IBM SurePOS terminals
•
Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the digital scanner through USB:
•
Windows® 98, 2000, ME, XP
•
MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.3
•
IBM 4690 OS.
USB Series A
Connector
Interface Cable
Interface Cable
USB Series A
Connector
USB Interface 6 - 3
The digital scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).
To set up the digital scanner:
1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner
(see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3).
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of
the IBM SurePOS terminal.
3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 6-5.
4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device
driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the
last choice. The digital scanner powers up during this installation.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-2.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 6-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6-5.
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1and Figure 6-2
are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the
scanner are the same.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 6-1
USB Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter Default Page
Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 6-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 6-6
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 6-8
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 6-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 6-9
Emulate Keypad Disable 6-9
Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 6-10
USB FN1 Substitution Disable 6-10
6 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Function Key Mapping Disable 6-11
Simulated Caps Lock Disable 6-11
Convert Case None 6-12
Table 6-1
USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
USB Interface 6 - 5
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Select the desired USB device type.
NOTE When changing USB Device Types, the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the standard
startup beep sequences.
*HID Keyboard Emulation
IBM Table Top USB
IBM Hand-Held USB
USB OPOS Handheld
Simple COM Port Emulation
6 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard
Emulation device.
NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the
standard startup beep sequences.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows 2000/XP
USB Interface 6 - 7
USB Country Keyboard Types - Country Codes (continued)
Spanish Windows
Italian Windows
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows (ASCII)
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
6 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
USB Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase
the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.
USB CAPS Lock Override
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. Enable this to preserve the case of the data
regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII)
keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
USB Interface 6 - 9
USB Ignore Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are
characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code
data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.
Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters, for IBM devices, to prevent sending bar codes
containing at least one unknown character are to the host, or for HID Keyboard Emulation devices, this sends the
bar code characters up to the unknown character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.
Emulate Keypad
Enable this to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A transmits as
“ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Disable)
*Disable Keypad Emulation
Enable Keypad Emulation
6 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero
Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading
zero. For example ASCII A transmits as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT BREAK”.
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. Enable this to replace any FN 1 characters in
a GS1 128 bar code with a user-selected Key Category and value (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 4-19 to
set the Key Category and Key Value).
*Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Enable
*Disable
USB Interface 6 - 11
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 6-2 on page 6-13). Enable this
parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold
entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Simulated Caps Lock
Enable this to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the
keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
6 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Convert Case
Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case.
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
USB Interface 6 - 13
ASCII Character Set for USB
Table 6-2
USB Prefix/Suffix Values
Prefix/ Suffix Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/
BACKSPACE
1
1009 $I CTRL I/
HORIZONTAL TAB
1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/
ENTER
1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable
Function Key Mapping on page
6-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
6 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [/
ESC
1
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
Table 6-2
USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable
Function Key Mapping on page
6-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
USB Interface 6 - 15
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
Table 6-2
USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable
Function Key Mapping on page
6-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
6 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W `
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
Table 6-2
USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable
Function Key Mapping on page
6-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
USB Interface 6 - 17
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 6-2
USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/ Suffix Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enable
Function Key Mapping on page
6-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
6 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 6-3
USB ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
USB Interface 6 - 19
Table 6-4
USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has
an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of
the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
6 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 6-4
USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key Keystroke
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has
an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of
the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
USB Interface 6 - 21
Table 6-5
USB F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
6 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 6-6
USB Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
USB Interface 6 - 23
Table 6-7
USB Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 PgUp
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Down Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
6 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 7 RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host. Use the RS-232 interface to connect
the digital scanner to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g.,
com port).
If your host does not appear in Table 7-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication
parameters to match the host.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
NOTE The digital scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For
system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Motorola offers different cables providing
TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for more information.
*Baud Rate 57,600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
7 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
Connect the digital scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 7-1
RS-232 Direct Connection
Figure 7-2
RS-232 Direct Connection for Scanner with Base
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner
(see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3).
Interface Cable
Serial Port Connector to
Host
Power Supply Cable
Interface Cable
Base
Serial Port
Connector to Host
Power Supply Cable
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2
are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the
scanner are the same.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 3
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply
into an appropriate outlet.
4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 7-7.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
7 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the RS-232 Host Parameters section beginning on page 7-5.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 7-1
RS-232 Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard 7-7
Baud Rate 9600 7-8
Parity Type None 7-10
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7-11
Data Bits 8-Bit 7-11
Check Receive Errors Enable 7-12
Hardware Handshaking None 7-12
Software Handshaking None 7-14
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 7-16
RTS Line State Low RTS 7-17
Beep on <BEL> Disable 7-17
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7-18
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 7-19
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7-19
RS-232 Interface 7 - 5
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, or Omron sets the defaults listed in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2
Terminal Specific RS-232
Parameter ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode
B/OPOS/JPOS
Olivetti Omron
Transmit Code ID
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Data Transmission
Format
Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/
Suffix Data/Suffix
Suffix
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013)
Baud Rate
9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Parity
Even None Odd Odd Even None
Hardware
Handshaking
RTS/CTS
Option 3 None RTS/CTS
Option 3 RTS/CTS
Option 3 None None
Software
Handshaking
None None None None Ack/Nak None
Serial Response
Time-out
9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.
Stop Bit Select
One One One One One One
ASCII Format
8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit
Beep On <BEL>
Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
RTS Line State
High Low Low Low = No data
to send Low High
Prefix
None None None None STX (1003) None
*In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
** If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host, it may appear
unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the
digital scanner.
7 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, or Omron enables
the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 7-3. These code ID characters are not programmable and
are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.
Table 7-3
Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
Olivetti Omron
UPC-A
AAA A AA
UPC-E
EEC C CE
EAN-8/JAN-8
FF FF B B B FF
EAN-13/JAN-13
FFA A AF
Code 39
C <len> None M M M <len> C <len>
Code 39 Full
ASCII
None None M M None None
Codabar
N <len> None N N N <len> N <len>
Code 128
L <len> None K K K <len> L <len>
I 2 of 5
I <len> None I I I <len> I <len>
Code 93
None None L L L <len> None
D 2 of 5
H <len> None H H H <len> H <len>
GS1-128 (formerly
UCC/EAN-128)
L <len> None P P P <len> L <len>
MSI
None None O O O <len> None
Bookland EAN
FFA A AF
Trioptic
None None None None None None
Code 11
None None None None None None
IATA
H<len> None H H None None
Code 32
None None None None None None
PDF417
None None Q Q None None
GS1 Databar 14/
Limited/Extended
None None E E None None
RS-232 Interface 7 - 7
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.
1Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits,
handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type bar code changes these settings.
Standard RS-2321
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
7 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the digital scanner's baud rate to match the
baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted
form.
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
Baud Rate 600
Baud Rate 1200
Baud Rate 2400
Baud Rate 4800
RS-232 Interface 7 - 9
Baud Rate (continued)
*Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
Baud Rate 57,600
Baud Rate 115,200
7 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host
device requirements.
•
Select Odd parity to set the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character
contains an odd number of 1 bits.
•
Select Even parity to set the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded
character contains an even number of 1 bits.
•
Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1.
•
Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0.
•
Select None when no parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
Mark
Space
*None
RS-232 Interface 7 - 11
Stop Bit Select
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Select the number of stop bits (one or
two) based on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to
match host device requirements.
Data Bits
This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
*1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
7-Bit
*8-Bit
7 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Check Receive Errors
Select whether or not to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters. The parity value of received
characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above.
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking
lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS).
Disable Standard RTS/CTS handshaking to transmit scan data as it becomes available. Select Standard RTS/CTS
handshaking to transmit scan data according to the following sequence:
•
The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the digital scanner waits up to Host
Serial Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out
(default), the CTS line is still asserted, the digital scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards any scanned
data.
•
When the CTS line is de-asserted, the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial
Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, the digital scanner transmits
data. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS line is not asserted, the digital scanner
sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.
•
When data transmission completes, the digital scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last
character.
•
The host should respond by negating CTS. The digital scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next
transmission of data.
During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms
between characters, the digital scanner aborts transmission, sounds a transmission error, and discards the data.
If this communication sequence fails, the digital scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and
must be rescanned.
If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
*Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 13
Hardware Handshaking (continued)
•
None: Scan this bar code to disable hardware handshaking.
•
Standard RTS/CTS: Scan this bar code to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.
•
RTS/CTS Option 1: If you select RTS/CTS Option 1, the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and
ignores the state of CTS. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission completes.
•
RTS/CTS Option 2: If you select Option 2, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level).
However, the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted
within Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards
the data.
•
RTS/CTS Option 3: If you select Option 3, the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission,
regardless of the state of CTS. The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out (default) for
CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and
discards the data. The digital scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete.
*None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
7 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware
handshaking. There are five options.
If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
•
None: Select this to transmit data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.
•
ACK/NAK: If you select this option, after transmitting data, the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK
response from the host. When it receives a NAK, the digital scanner transmits the same data again and waits
for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the digital
scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK.
If the digital scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data.
There are no retries when a time-out occurs.
•
ENQ: If you select this option, the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before
transmitting data. If it does not receive an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the digital scanner
issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every
Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors.
•
ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK
from the host, an additional ENQ is not required.
•
XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the digital scanner receives
an XON character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
•The digital scanner receives an XOFF before has data to send. When the digital scanner has data to send,
it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If it does not
receive the XON within this time, the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
•The digital scanner receives an XOFF during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending
the current byte. When the digital scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data
message. The digital scanner waits indefinitely for the XON.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 15
Software Handshaking (continued)
*None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
7 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Host Serial Response Time-out
This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a
transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or
RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.
*Minimum: 2 Sec
Low: 2.5 Sec
Medium: 5 Sec
High: 7.5 Sec
Maximum: 9.9 Sec
RS-232 Interface 7 - 17
RTS Line State
This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High
RTS line state.
Beep on <BEL>
If you enable this parameter, the digital scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the RS-232
serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
*Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
7 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
RS-232 Interface 7 - 19
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, this indicates when the digital scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes with Unknown
Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.
Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown
character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED immediately after decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
*Send Bar Code
(with unknown characters)
Do Not Send Bar Codes
(with unknown characters)
7 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ASCII Character Set for RS-232
You can assign the values in Table 7-4 as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.
Table 7-4
Prefix/Suffix Values
Prefix/Suffix
Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
1000
%U NUL
1001
$A SOH
1002
$B STX
1003
$C ETX
1004
$D EOT
1005
$E ENQ
1006
$F ACK
1007
$G BELL
1008
$H BCKSPC
1009
$I HORIZ TAB
1010
$J LF/NW LN
1011
$K VT
1012
$L FF
1013
$M CR/ENTER
1014
$N SO
1015
$O SI
1016
$P DLE
1017
$Q DC1/XON
1018
$R DC2
1019
$S DC3/XOFF
1020
$T DC4
1021
$U NAK
1022
$V SYN
1023
$W ETB
1024
$X CAN
1025
$Y EM
1026
$Z SUB
RS-232 Interface 7 - 21
1027
%A ESC
1028
%B FS
1029
%C GS
1030
%D RS
1031
%E US
1032
Space Space
1033
/A !
1034
/B "
1035
/C #
1036
/D $
1037
/E %
1038
/F &
1039
/G ‘
1040
/H (
1041
/I )
1042
/J *
1043
/K +
1044
/L ,
1045
--
1046
..
1047
/O /
1048
00
1049
11
1050
22
1051
33
1052
44
1053
55
1054
66
1055
77
1056
88
Table 7-4
Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix
Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
7 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1057
99
1058
/Z :
1059
%F ;
1060
%G <
1061
%H =
1062
%I >
1063
%J ?
1064
%V @
1065
AA
1066
BB
1067
CC
1068
DD
1069
EE
1070
FF
1071
GG
1072
HH
1073
II
1074
JJ
1075
KK
1076
LL
1077
MM
1078
NN
1079
OO
1080
PP
1081
QQ
1082
RR
1083
SS
1084
TT
1085
UU
1086
VV
Table 7-4
Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix
Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
RS-232 Interface 7 - 23
1087
WW
1088
XX
1089
YY
1090
ZZ
1091
%K [
1092
%L \
1093
%M ]
1094
%N ^
1095
%O _
1096
%W `
1097
+A a
1098
+B b
1099
+C c
1100
+D d
1101
+E e
1102
+F f
1103
+G g
1104
+H h
1105
+I i
1106
+J j
1107
+K k
1108
+L l
1109
+M m
1110
+N n
1111
+O o
1112
+P p
1113
+Q q
1114
+R r
1115
+S s
1116
+T t
Table 7-4
Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix
Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
7 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1117
+U u
1118
+V v
1119
+W w
1120
+X x
1121
+Y y
1122
+Z z
1123
%P {
1124
%Q |
1125
%R }
1126
%S ~
1127
Undefined
7013
ENTER
Table 7-4
Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)
Prefix/Suffix
Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
Chapter 8 IBM 468X / 469X Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
*Disable Convert to Code 39 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
8 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host
Connect the digital scanner directly to the host interface.
Figure 8-1
IBM Direct Connection
Figure 8-2
IBM Direct Connection for Scanner with Base
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner.
See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3.
2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).
3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 8-4.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
Interface Cable
Host Port Connector
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2
are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the
scanner are the same.
NOTE The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other digital scanner
parameters.
IBM 468X / 469X Interface 8 - 3
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 8-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8-4.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8-1
IBM Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected 8-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 8-5
8 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used.
NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the digital scanner.
None Selected
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
IBM 468X / 469X Interface 8 - 5
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
8 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 9 Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a wand emulation host when you need Wand
Emulation communication. The digital scanner connects to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in
a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal.
In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it "readable" by a wand decoder.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
*Transmit Unknown
Characters Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
9 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting Using Wand Emulation
To perform Wand Emulation, connect the digital scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the
wand data and interprets it for the host.
Figure 9-1
Wand Emulation Connection
Figure 9-2
Wand Emulation Connection for Scanner with Base
1. Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to cable interface port on the digital
scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3).
2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or
controller.
Wand Port
Interface Cable
Mobile Computer
Interface Cable
Wand Port
Mobile Computer
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 and Figure
9-2are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the
scanner are the same.
Wand Emulation Interface 9 - 3
3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types
on page 9-5.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
WARNING!Connect the digital scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the digital scanner to a 12
volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty.
9 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 9-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters on page 9-5.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 9-1
Wand Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller 9-5
Leading Margin 80 msec 9-6
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 9-7
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore 9-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 9-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 9-9
Wand Emulation Interface 9 - 5
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types
Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller
Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI)
Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon)
9 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone)
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar
of the scan, in milliseconds. The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This
parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins.
NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient.
*80 msec
140 msec
200 msec
Wand Emulation Interface 9 - 7
Polarity
Polarity determines how the digital scanner's Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Barcode Pattern
(DBP). DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP in a certain
format. The DBP either has the "highs" represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs"
represent spaces (margins) and the "lows" represent bars.
Scan the appropriate bar code to select the polarity required by the decoder.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.
Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to prevent sending bar codes containing at least one
unknown character to the host. The digital scanner issues an error beep.
*Bar High/Margin Low
Bar Low/Margin High
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Do Not Transmit)
9 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the decoded symbology. This can be a
problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for example, GS1 DataBar).
Enable this parameter to ignore the decoded symbology, and transmit the data as a Code 39 bar code. Lowercase
characters in the original data stream transmit as uppercase characters. This also allows ADF Formatting.
Enable Ignore Unknown Characters to replace any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the
Code 39 symbology set with a space.
If you disable Ignore Unknown Characters, when the digital scanner encounters characters that do not have a
corresponding Code 39 character, it emits an error beep and transmits no data.
NOTE ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow ADF rules to affect scanned data.
Enabling this parameter allows ADF rules to affect scanned data (Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting).
Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
*Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
Wand Emulation Interface 9 - 9
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII
By default, a space replaces characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set.
Enable this parameter to encode data sent to the wand Interface in Code 39 Full ASCII. This setting requires that
the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data.
This setting applies only if you enabled Convert to Code 39.
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
NOTE Wand Emulation emits an error beep when there is an attempt to send composite data. No data transmits.
9 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 10 Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the digital scanner. With this interface, the
digital scanner is connected between the keyboard and host computer, and translates bar code data into
keystrokes. The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar
code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply
passed through.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
*North American Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
10 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Figure 10-1
Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable
Figure 10-2
Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable for Scanner with Base
To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable:
Male DIN Connector
Female DIN Connector
Keyboard Connector
Female DIN Connector
Keyboard Connector
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 and Figure
10-2 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect
the scanner are the same
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 3
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.
2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the digital scanner. See Installing the
Interface Cable on page 1-3.
3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
5. If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
6. Ensure that all connections are secure.
7. Turn on the host system.
8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host
Types on page 10-5.
9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 10-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 10-5.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 10-1
Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles 10-5
Country Types (Country Codes) North American 10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 10-8
Keystroke Delay No Delay 10-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 10-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad
Emulation Disable 10-9
Caps Lock On Disable 10-10
Caps Lock Override Disable 10-10
Convert Wedge Data No Convert 10-11
10 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Function Key Mapping Disable 10-11
FN1 Substitution Disable 10-12
Send and Make Break Send 10-12
Table 10-1
Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 5
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
IBM PS/2 (Model 30)
IBM AT Notebook
NCR 7052
10 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If your keyboard type does not appear, see Alternate
Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 10-9.
*North American
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows XP/2000
Spanish Windows
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 7
Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country Codes (continued)
Italian Windows
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
10 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.
Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown
character. The digital scanner issues an error beep.
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when
hosts require a slower transmission of data.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
(Transmit)
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 9
Intra-Keystroke Delay
Enable this to insert an additional delay between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the
Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well.
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types - Country
Codes on page 10-6 in a Microsoft® operating system environment.
Enable
*Disable
Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
*Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
10 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Caps Lock On
Enable this to emulate keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed.
Caps Lock Override
If you enable this, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an
‘A’ in the bar code transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
Enable Caps Lock On
*Disable Caps Lock On
Enable Caps Lock Override
*Disable Caps Lock Override
NOTE If both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 11
Convert Wedge Data
Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case.
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 10-2 on page 10-15). Enable this
parameter to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold
entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*No Convert
Enable
*Disable
10 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
FN1 Substitution
Enable this to replace FN1 characters in a GS1 128 bar code with a user-selected keystroke (see FN1 Substitution
on page 10-12).
Send Make and Break
Enable this to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
Enable
*Disable
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 13
Keyboard Maps
Refer to the following keyboard maps for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values,
see the bar codes on page 4-17.
Figure 10-3
IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
Figure 10-4
IBM PC/AT
Figure 10-5
NCR 7052 32-Key
7013
7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010
7013
5011 7010 7007 7006
7001
5012
7008
7009
7011 7012 7003
7002 7004 7005
7017 7016
7015
7018
5001 5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
5007 5008
5009 5010
7009
7008
7013
7012
7004
7011
7003
7002
7014
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
5001
5017
7013
5011
(7013 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
10 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Figure 10-6
NCR 7052 58-Key
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
5001
1066
1072 1073
1079 1080
1065 1070
1076 1077
1083 1084
1071
1078
1085
1069
5017
7013
5011
1082
1075
1068
1067
(1043 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
1074
1081
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 15
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge
NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and
assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B,
it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table 10-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/
BACKSPACE
1
1009 $I CTRL I/
HORIZONTAL TAB
1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/
ENTER
1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled
Function Key Mapping on
page 10-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
10 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [ /
ESC
1
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
Table 10-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled
Function Key Mapping on
page 10-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 17
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
Table 10-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled
Function Key Mapping on
page 10-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
10 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
Table 10-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled
Function Key Mapping on
page 10-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 19
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 10-3
Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
Table 10-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char.acter Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled
Function Key Mapping on
page 10-11
. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke transmits.
10 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
Table 10-4
Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set
GUI Keys Keystrokes
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
Table 10-3
Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set (Continued)
ALT Keys Keystroke
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 21
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 10-4
Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Keys Keystrokes
10 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 10-5
Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
Table 10-6
Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
Keyboard Wedge Interface 10 - 23
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table 10-7
Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
Table 10-6
Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
10 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Table 10-7
Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set (Continued)
Extended Keypad Keystroke
Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner with a Scanner Emulation host. In this mode, the digital
scanner connects to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS)
terminal.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
*Parameter Process
and Pass-Through Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
11 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation
To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the digital scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the
data and interprets it for the host.
Figure 11-1
Scanner Emulation Connection
Figure 11-2
Scanner Emulation Connection for Scanner with Base
1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the cable interface port on the digital
scanner. See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-3.
2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the scanner port on the mobile computer or
controller.
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
Interface Cable
Host Port Connector
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 11-1 and Figure
11-2 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect
the scanner are the same.
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 3
3. Scan the Scanner Emulation Host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 11-5 to enable the Scanner
Emulation host interface.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
WARNING!Connect the digital scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the digital scanner to a 12
volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty.
11 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 11-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 11-5.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 11-1
Scanner Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11-5
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 11-6
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11-7
Module Width 20 µs 11-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert to Bar Codes to Code 39 11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11-8
Transmission Timeout 3 seconds 11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11-10
Leading Margin 2 ms 11-10
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11-11
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 5
Scanner Emulation Host
Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host.
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters
Beep Style
The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles.
•
Beep On Successful Transmit: The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode
signal to the digital scanner, so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time.
•
Beep At Decode Time: The digital scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence
from most decoders, since the digital scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when
it successfully decodes the output.
•
Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep.
In all cases, if an error occurs, the digital scanner issues error beeps.
Scanner Emulation Host
*Beep On Successful Transmit
Beep At Decode Time
Do Not Beep
11 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parameter Pass-Through
The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder.
In this way, customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning
the necessary parameters only once.
For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The digital scanner and the
attached decoder both process the parameter.
*Parameter Process and Pass-Through
Parameter Process Only
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 7
Convert Newer Code Types
The digital scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow
compatibility in these environments, the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable
symbologies, as per the following chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart transmit normally.
When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and
transmits no data. The amount of data in the scanned newer bar code type should not exceed that of the
conversion code type.
Module Width
The standard module width is 20 µs. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 µs Module Width.
Scan this Code Type: Transmitted as:
Code 11 Code 39
GS1 DataBar (14, Limited, and Expanded), Coupon Code, PDF, MicroPDF,
MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, Postal Codes, Composite Codes Code 128
*Convert Newer Code Types
Reject Newer Code Types
*20 µs Module Width
50 µs Module Width
11 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable converting all bar code data to Code 39.
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
By default, a space replaces any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology
set. Enable this parameter to encode data sent to the Scanner Emulation host in Code 39 Full ASCII. The host
must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data.
This setting applies only if you enabled Convert to Code 39.
*Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39
Convert All To Code 39
*Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
NOTE Scanner Emulation emits an error beep and does not send any data if the scanned data exceeds the
maximum length for Code 39.
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 9
Transmission Timeout
The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert
the Decode signal, indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not
asserted (indicating that the attached decoder did not successfully receive the bar code data), the digital scanner
issues transmit error beeps.
Scan the appropriate bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout.
*3 Second Transmission Timeout
4 Second Transmission Timeout
5 Second Transmission Timeout
10 Second Transmission Timeout
30 Second Transmission Timeout
11 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. Select Ignore Unknown Characters to send
all bar code data except for unknown characters. The digital scanner issues no error beeps.
Select Convert Error on Unknown Characters to prevent sending bar codes containing at least one unknown
character to the decoder. The digital scanner issues a convert error beep.
Leading Margin
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration.
*Ignore Unknown Characters
Convert Error On Unknown Characters
1 ms Leading Margin
*2 ms Leading Margin
3 ms Leading Margin
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 11
Leading Margin (continued)
Check For Decode LED
The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host to indicate that it
successfully decoded the transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this
case, the digital scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code did not successfully transmit. Scan
the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps.
5 ms Leading Margin
10 ms Leading Margin
*Check For Decode LED
Ignore Decode LED
11 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 12 123Scan
Introduction
123Scan is a Windows®-based utility that programs the digital scanner with all parameters including Advanced
Data Formatting (ADF) rules. An ADF rule modifies bar code data before it transmits to the host to ensure
compatibility between bar coded data and the host application. You can program digital scanners via PC download
or by scanning a sheet of bar codes generated by the 123Scan utility. Digital scanner programming is saved in a
file for electronic distribution. The 123Scan program includes a help file.
Communication with 123Scan
To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows operating system,
use an RS-232 cable to connect the digital scanner to the host computer (see Connecting an RS-232 Interface on
page 7-2).
123Scan requirements:
•
Host computer with Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
•
Digital scanner
•
RS-232 cable.
123Scan Parameter
To communicate with the 123Scan program, load 123Scan, included in the documentation CD-ROM, onto the host
computer, and scan the bar code below. Refer to 123Scan instructions for programming the digital scanner.
Scan the bar code below to enable the 123Scan interface on the digital scanner.
123Scan Configuration
12 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 13 Symbologies
Introduction
This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features.
Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down.
Select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is
only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4. Throughout the programming
bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the
UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check
Digit on page 13-14. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful
parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes. See the individual
parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
*Enable UPC-A
(01h) Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
13 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 13-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. There are two ways to change the default values:
•
Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 4-4.
•
Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program (see Chapter 12, 123Scan).
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 13-1
Parameter Defaults
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
UPC/EAN
UPC-A 01h Enable 13-7
UPC-E 02h Enable 13-7
UPC-E1 0Ch Disable 13-8
EAN-8/JAN 8 04h Enable 13-8
EAN-13/JAN 13 03h Enable 13-9
Bookland EAN 53h Disable 13-9
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) 10h Ignore 13-11
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
Supplemental 2:
F1h 43h
F1h 44h
13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 13-13
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 28h Enable 13-14
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 29h Enable 13-14
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 13-15
UPC-A Preamble 22h System Character 13-16
UPC-E Preamble 23h System Character 13-16
UPC-E1 Preamble 24h System Character 13-18
Convert UPC-E to A 25h Disable 13-19
Symbologies 13 - 3
Convert UPC-E1 to A 26h Disable 13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 27h Disable 13-20
Bookland ISBN Format F1h 40h ISBN-10 13-21
UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 13-22
ISSN EAN F1h 69h Disable 13-22
Code 128
Code 128 08h Enable 13-23
Set Length(s) for Code 128 D1h D2h Any Length 13-23
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 0Eh Enable 13-25
ISBT 128 54h Enable 13-25
ISBT Concatenation F1h 41h Disable 13-26
Check ISBT Table F1h 42h Enable 13-27
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy DFh 10 13-27
Code 39
Code 39 00h Enable 13-28
Trioptic Code 39 0Dh Disable 13-28
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) 56h Disable 13-29
Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 13-29
Set Length(s) for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 13-30
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 13-32
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 13-32
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 13-33
Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 13-33
Code 93
Code 93 09h Disable 13-36
Set Length(s) for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 13-36
Code 11
Code 11 0Ah Disable 13-38
Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 13-38
Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 13-40
Table 13-1
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
13 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 2Fh Disable 13-41
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 06h Enable 13-41
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 13-42
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 13-44
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 13-44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 13-45
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 13-45
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 13-46
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 07h Disable 13-48
Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 13-48
CLSI Editing 36h Disable 13-50
NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 13-50
MSI
MSI 0Bh Disable 13-51
Set Length(s) for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 13-51
MSI Check Digits 32h One 13-53
Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 13-53
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-54
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5 F0h 98h Disable 13-54
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 F1h 6Ah Disable 13-55
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch 1 Length - 14 13-56
Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy F1h 6Dh Disable 13-57
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit F1h 6Eh Disable 13-57
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit F1h 6Fh Disable 13-58
Table 13-1
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
Symbologies 13 - 5
Inverse 1D
F1h 4Ah Regular 13-59
Postal Codes
US Postnet 59h Enable 13-60
US Planet 5Ah Enable 13-60
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 13-61
UK Postal 5Bh Enable 13-61
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 13-62
Japan Postal F0h 22h Enable 13-62
Australian Postal F0h 23h Enable 13-63
Netherlands KIX Code F0h 46h Enable 13-63
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail F1h 50h Disable 13-64
UPU FICS Postal F1h 63h Disable 13-64
GS1 DataBar (formerly Reduced Space Symbology)
GS1 DataBar-14 F0h 52h Enable 13-65
GS1 DataBar Limited F0h 53h Enable 13-65
GS1 DataBar Expanded F0h 54h Enable 13-66
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN F0h 8Dh Disable 13-66
Composite
Composite CC-C F0h 55h Disable 13-67
Composite CC-A/B F0h 56h Disable 13-67
Composite TLC-39 F0h 73h Disable 13-68
UPC Composite Mode F0h 58h Always Linked 13-68
Composite Beep Mode F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code
Type is Decoded 13-69
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for GS1 Composite Codes
(formerly UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes)
F0h ABh Disable 13-69
2D Symbologies
PDF417 0Fh Enable 13-70
MicroPDF417 E3h Disable 13-70
Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 13-71
Table 13-1
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
13 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Data Matrix F0h 24h Enable 13-72
Data Matrix Inverse F1h 4Ch Regular 13-72
Maxicode F0h 26h Enable 13-73
QR Code F0h 25h Enable 13-74
QR Inverse F1h 4Bh Regular 13-74
MicroQR F1h 3Dh Enable 13-75
Aztec F1h 3Eh Enable 13-75
Aztec Inverse F1h 4Dh Regular 13-76
Symbology-Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 13-77
Security Level 4Dh 1 13-79
Intercharacter Gap Size F0h 7Dh Normal 13-80
Report Version 13-80
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer 13-81
Abort Macro PDF Entry 13-81
Table 13-1
Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
Symbologies 13 - 7
UPC/EAN
Enable/Disable UPC-A
Parameter # 01h
To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable UPC-E
Parameter # 02h
To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable UPC-A
(01h)
Disable UPC-A
(00h)
*Enable UPC-E
(01h)
Disable UPC-E
(00h)
13 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable UPC-E1
Parameter # 0Ch
UPC-E1 is disabled by default.
To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 04h
To enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.
NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1
(01h)
*Disable UPC-E1
(00h)
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(01h)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 9
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 03h
To enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
Parameter # 53h
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(01h)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(00h)
Enable Bookland EAN
(01h)
*Disable Bookland EAN
(00h)
NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 13-21. Also select either Decode
UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental
Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 13-10.
13 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Parameter # 10h
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN
13+2). The following options are available:
•
If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN plus
supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
•
If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
•
If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode
the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-13 before
transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
•
If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the scanner immediately transmits EAN-13
bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a
supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no
supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.
• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-13.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of
two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on
page 13-13.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix
listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-13.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any
prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
Supplementals on page 13-13.
NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 13-9 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using
Bookland ISBN Format on page 13-21.
NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
Symbologies 13 - 11
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals
(01h)
*Ignore Supplementals
(00h)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(02h)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(04h)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
(05h)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
(07h)
13 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
(06h)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
(08h)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(03h)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1
(09h)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2
(0Ah)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1
(0Bh)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2
(0Ch)
Symbologies 13 - 13
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1: Parameter # F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: Parameter # F1h 44h
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page
13-10, select User-Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the
numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. Select User-Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3-digit
prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Parameter # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals, this option adjusts the number of times to
decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is
recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10.
Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
13 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Parameter # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Parameter # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(00h)
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 15
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(00h)
13 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 17
UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
13 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(00h)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(01h)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 19
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Parameter # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After
conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).
Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Parameter # 26h
Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data
follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Disable this to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(00h)
13 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend
Parameter # 27h
Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to
EAN-13 symbols.
Disable this to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(01h)
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 21
Bookland ISBN Format
Parameter # F1h 40h
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 13-9, select one of the following
formats for Bookland data:
•
Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with
the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
•
Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*Bookland ISBN-10
(00h)
Bookland ISBN-13
(01h)
NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
on page 13-9, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN
Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on
page 13-10.
13 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Parameter # 55h
Enable this parameter to decode UPC-A bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit ‘99’,
and UPC-A/GS1-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to scan all types of
Coupon Codes.
ISSN EAN
Parameter # F1h 69h
To enable or disable ISSN EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(01h)
*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(00h)
NOTE See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-13 to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 (right half) of a coupon code.
Enable ISSN EAN
(01h)
*Disable ISSN EAN
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 23
Code 128
Enable/Disable Code 128
Parameter # 08h
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Code 128
Parameter # L1 = D1h, L2 = D2h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by
4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 128 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 128 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
*Enable Code 128
(01h)
Disable Code 128
(00h)
NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
13 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 128 - Length Within Range
*Code 128 - Any Length
Symbologies 13 - 25
Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
Parameter # 0Eh
To enable or disable GS1-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable ISBT 128
Parameter # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable
ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.
*Enable GS1-128
(01h)
Disable GS1-128
(00h)
*Enable ISBT 128
(01h)
Disable ISBT 128
(00h)
13 - 26 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ISBT Concatenation
Parameter # F1h 41h
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
•
If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation, the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT
codes it encounters.
•
If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation, there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to
decode and perform concatenation. The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.
•
If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation, the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs
of ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the digital scanner must decode the
symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 13-27 before transmitting its
data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.
*Disable ISBT Concatenation
(00h)
Enable ISBT Concatenation
(01h)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 27
Check ISBT Table
Parameter # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs.
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this
table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Parameter # DFh
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the digital
scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.
Scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes to set a value
between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2. The default is 10.
*Enable Check ISBT Table
(01h)
Disable Check ISBT Table
(00h)
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
13 - 28 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 39
Enable/Disable Code 39
Parameter # 00h
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39
Parameter # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols
always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Code 39
(01h)
Disable Code 39
(00h)
Enable Trioptic Code 39
(01h)
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
(00h)
NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Symbologies 13 - 29
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Parameter # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below
to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # E7h
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes.
NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(01h)
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(00h)
NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix
(01h)
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
(00h)
13 - 30 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Code 39
Parameter # L1 = 12h, L2 = 13h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner capability.
NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Symbologies 13 - 31
Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Any Length
13 - 32 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 30h
Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified
check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this
feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Bh
Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(00h)
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h)
NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Symbologies 13 - 33
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Parameter # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable
or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store
Parameter # 71h
This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols.
Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading
space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered.
Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first-in first-out
format, plus the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details.
Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the
buffer.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
(01h)
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(00h)
NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII
Character Set Table for the appropriate interface. See the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 6-13 or
the ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 7-20.
13 - 34 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 39 Buffering - Scan & Store (continued)
This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the digital scanner to
decode Code 39 symbology only.
While there is data in the transmission buffer, you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39. The buffer holds 200
bytes of information.
To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see
Transmit Buffer on page 13-35) or clear the buffer.
Buffer Data
To buffer data, enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start
pattern.
•
Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the digital scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate
successful decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page
13-35.)
•
The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.
•
No transmission occurs.
Clear Transmission Buffer
To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a
dash (minus), and a stop character.
•
The digital scanner issues a short high/low/high beep.
•
The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer.
•
No transmission occurs.
Buffer Code 39 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable)
(00h)
Clear Buffer
NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39
lengths to include length 1.
Symbologies 13 - 35
Transmit Buffer
There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer.
1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below, which includes only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop
character.
2. The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
•
The digital scanner issues a low/high beep.
3. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space.
•
The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data.
•
The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
•
The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low/high beep.
•
Digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
Overfilling Transmission Buffer
The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer:
•
The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long, high beeps.
•
No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.
Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer
If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:
•
A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty.
•
No transmission occurs.
•
The buffer remains empty.
Transmit Buffer
NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character. In order to scan this command, set Code 39
lengths to include length 1.
13 - 36 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 93
Enable/Disable Code 93
Parameter # 09h
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Code 93
Parameter # L1 = 1Ah, L2 = 1Bh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
Enable Code 93
(01h)
*Disable Code 93
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 37
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 93 - Length Within Range
Code 93 - Any Length
13 - 38 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 11
Code 11
Parameter # 0Ah
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Code 11
Parameter # L1 = 1Ch, L2 = 1Dh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
Enable Code 11
(01h)
*Disable Code 11
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 39
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 11 - Length Within Range
Code 11 - Any Length
13 - 40 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 34h
This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies
with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code.
The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature.
To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the Code
11 symbols.
*Disable
(00h)
One Check Digit
(01h)
Two Check Digits
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 41
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
Parameter # 2Fh
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Parameter # 06h
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5
length from the following pages.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h)
NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(01h)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(00h)
13 - 42 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
Parameter # L1 = 16h, L2 = 17h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select
the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2
of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct
an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete
Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on
page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of
5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0,
4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this,
select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.
Symbologies 13 - 43
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
13 - 44 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 31h
Enable this feature to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified
Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 2Ch
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
*Disable
(00h)
USS Check Digit
(01h)
OPCC Check Digit
(02h)
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 45
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 52h
Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To
accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13
check digit.
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5
Parameter # 05h
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)
(01h)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(00h)
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(00h)
13 - 46 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
Parameter # L1 = 14h, L2 = 15h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2
of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then
scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of
the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5
applications.
Symbologies 13 - 47
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
13 - 48 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Codabar (NW - 7)
Enable/Disable Codabar
Parameter # 07h
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Codabar
Parameter # L1 = 18h, L2 = 19h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the
digital scanner’s capability.
Enable Codabar
(01h)
*Disable Codabar
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 49
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Any Length
13 - 50 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CLSI Editing
Parameter # 36h
Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth
characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format.
NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 37h
Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if
the host system requires this data format.
NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing
(01h)
*Disable CLSI Editing
(00h)
Enable NOTIS Editing
(01h)
*Disable NOTIS Editing
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 51
MSI
Enable/Disable MSI
Parameter # 0Bh
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for MSI
Parameter # L1 = 1Eh, L2 = 1Fh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select
the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI
symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an
error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected
lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then
scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select
lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI
symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4,
1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error or change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the digital
scanner’s capability.
Enable MSI
(01h)
*Disable MSI
(00h)
13 - 52 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this,
select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Any Length
Symbologies 13 - 53
MSI Check Digits
Parameter # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is
optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification
of the second check digit.
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 13-54 for the selection of second digit algorithms.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Parameter # 2Eh
Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
*One MSI Check Digit
(00h)
Two MSI Check Digits
(01h)
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(01h
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(00h)
13 - 54 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Parameter # 33h
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below
corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # F0h 98h
To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
MOD 10/MOD 11
(00h)
*MOD 10/MOD 10
(01h)
Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 55
Matrix 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # F1h 6Ah
To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(00h)
13 - 56 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # L1 = F1h 6Bh, L2 = F1h 6Ch
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Matrix 2 of 5 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To correct an error
or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-2.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within
the digital scanner’s capability.
*Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
Symbologies 13 - 57
Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy
Parameter # F1h 6Dh
To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 redundancy, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # F1h 6Eh
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy
(00h)
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(01h)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(00h)
13 - 58 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # F1h 6Fh
Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(01h)
*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 59
Inverse 1D
Parameter # F1h 4Ah
This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting. Options are:
•
Regular Only - the scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only.
•
Inverse Only - the scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - the scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes.
*Regular
(00h)
Inverse Only
(01h)
Inverse Autodetect
(02h)
13 - 60 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 59h
To enable or disable US Postnet, scan the appropriate bar code below.
US Planet
Parameter # 5Ah
To enable or disable US Planet, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable US Postnet
(01h)
Disable US Postnet
(00h)
*Enable US Planet
(01h)
Disable US Planet
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 61
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 5Fh
Select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the
check digit.
UK Postal
Parameter # 5Bh
To enable or disable UK Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(00h)
*Enable UK Postal
(01h)
Disable UK Postal
(00h)
13 - 62 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 60h
Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
Japan Postal
Parameter # F0h, 22h
To enable or disable Japan Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(01h)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(00h)
*Enable Japan Postal
(01h)
Disable Japan Postal
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 63
Australian Postal
Parameter # F0h, 23h
To enable or disable Australian Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Netherlands KIX Code
Parameter # F0h, 46h
To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Australian Postal
(01h)
Disable Australian Postal
(00h)
*Enable Netherlands KIX Code
(01h)
Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(00h)
13 - 64 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
Parameter # F1h 50h
To enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, scan the appropriate bar code below.
UPU FICS Postal
Parameter # F1h 63h
To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(01h)
*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(00h)
Enable UPU FICS Postal
(01h)
*Disable UPU FICS Postal
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 65
GS1 DataBar (formerly Reduced Space Symbology)
The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded
versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar-14
Parameter # F0h 52h.
GS1 DataBar Limited
Parameter # F0h 53h.
*Enable GS1 DataBar-14
(01h)
Disable GS1 DataBar 14
(00h)
*Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(01h)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited
(00h)
13 - 66 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar Expanded
Parameter # F0h 54h.
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
Parameter # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar-14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a
Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a
single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13.
For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and
reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country
code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
*Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(01h)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(00h)
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
(01h)
*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 67
Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # F0h 55h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.
Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # F0h 56h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-C
(01h)
*Disable CC-C
(00h)
Enable CC-A/B
(01h)
*Disable CC-A/B
(00h)
13 - 68 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Composite TLC-39
Parameter # F0h 73h
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.
UPC Composite Mode
Parameter # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
•
Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
•
Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion.
If 2D is not present, the UPC bar code does not transmit.
•
If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites, the scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then
transmits the UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
Enable TLC39
(01h)
*Disable TLC39
(00h)
UPC Never Linked
(00h)
*UPC Always Linked
(01h)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 69
Composite Beep Mode
Parameter # F0h, 8Eh
To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded, scan the appropriate bar code.
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for GS1 Composite Codes (formerly UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation
Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes)
Parameter # F0h, ABh
Select whether to enable or disable this mode.
Single Beep after both are decoded
(00h)
*Beep as each code type is decoded
(01h)
Double Beep after both are decoded
(02h)
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
GS1 Composite Codes
(01h)
*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
GS1 Composite Codes
(00h)
13 - 70 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
2D Symbologies
Enable/Disable PDF417
Parameter # 0Fh
To enable or disable PDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417
Parameter # E3h
To enable or disable MicroPDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable PDF417
(01h)
Disable PDF417
(00h)
Enable MicroPDF417
(01h)
*Disable MicroPDF417
(00h)
Symbologies 13 - 71
Code 128 Emulation
Parameter # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. AIM Code ID Character
(01h) on page 4-16 must be enabled for this parameter to work.
Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites
instead.
Enable Code 128 Emulation
(01h)
*Disable Code 128 Emulation
(00h)
13 - 72 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Data Matrix
Parameter # F0h, 24h
To enable or disable Data Matrix, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Data Matrix Inverse
Parameter # F1h 4Ch
This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting. Options are:
•
Regular Only - the scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only.
•
Inverse Only - the scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - the scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.
*Enable Data Matrix
(01h)
Disable Data Matrix
(00h)
*Regular
(00h)
Inverse Only
(01h)
Inverse Autodetect
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 73
Maxicode
Parameter # F0h, 26h
To enable or disable Maxicode, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Maxicode
(01h)
Disable Maxicode
(00h)
13 - 74 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
QR Code
Parameter # F0h,25h
To enable or disable QR Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.
QR Inverse
Parameter # F1h 4Bh
This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting. Options are:
•
Regular Only - the scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only.
•
Inverse Only - the scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - the scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes.
*Enable QR Code
(01h)
Disable QR Code
(00h)
*Regular
(00h)
Inverse Only
(01h)
Inverse Autodetect
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 75
MicroQR
Parameter # F1h 3Dh
To enable or disable MicroQR, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Aztec
Parameter # F1h 3Eh
To enable or disable Aztec, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable MicroQR
(01h)
Disable MicroQR
(00h)
*Enable Aztec
(01h)
Disable Aztec
(00h)
13 - 76 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Aztec Inverse
Parameter # F1h 4Dh
This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting. Options are:
•
Regular Only - the scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only.
•
Inverse Only - the scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only.
•
Inverse Autodetect - the scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.
*Regular
(00h)
Inverse Only
(01h)
Inverse Autodetect
(02h)
Symbologies 13 - 77
Redundancy Level
Parameter # 4Eh
The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels
of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the digital scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.
Redundancy Level 1
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 2
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 3
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes
must be read three times:
Table 13-2
Redundancy Level 1 Codes
Code Type Code Length
Codabar 8 characters or less
MSI 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Table 13-3
Redundancy Level 2 Codes
Code Type Code Length
All All
Table 13-4
Redundancy Level 3 Codes
Code Type Code Length
MSI Plessey 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Codabar 8 characters or less
13 - 78 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Redundancy Level 4
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:
Table 13-5
Redundancy Level 4 Codes
Code Type Code Length
All All
*Redundancy Level 1
(01h)
Redundancy Level 2
(02h)
Redundancy Level 3
(03h)
Redundancy Level 4
(04h)
Symbologies 13 - 79
Security Level
Parameter # 4Dh
The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an
inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security
necessary for any given application.
•
Security Level 0: This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.
•
Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
•
Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be
advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes.
Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner. If you need this
level of security, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
Security Level 0
(00h)
*Security Level 1
(01h)
Security Level 2
(02h)
Security Level 3
(03h)
13 - 80 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Intercharacter Gap Size
Parameter # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar
code-printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the digital scanner
from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these
out-of-specification bar codes.
Report Version
Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner.
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(06h)
Large Intercharacter Gaps
(0Ah)
Report Software Version
Symbologies 13 - 81
Macro PDF Features
Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The digital scanner can
decode symbols that are encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to
50 MacroPDF symbols.
Flush Macro Buffer
This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmits it to the host device, and
aborts from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
This clears all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF
mode.
CAUTION When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When
scanning Macro PDF sequences, scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption. If, when
scanning a mixed sequence, the digital scanner emits two long low beeps (Low/Low) this indicates an
inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
13 - 82 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 14 Driver’s License Set Up
(DS6708-DL)
Introduction
The DS6708-DL digital scanner is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver's licenses and
certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards. Parsing can be
achieved in one of two ways:
•
Internally embedded algorithms - scanning bar codes activate algorithms internally embedded in the digital
scanner to produce formatted data. Use the formatted data for age verification, credit card application
information, and more.
•
Server based parsing algorithms - the digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards but encrypts the content
and sends this to a host side application. The host side application uses Motorola's server based parsing
algorithms, provided as a .DLL, to produce formatted data.
This chapter describes how to program the Symbol DS6708-DL digital scanner to read and use the data contained
in the 2D bar codes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
14 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Driver’s License Parsing
There are three options available for programming the digital scanner:
•
No driver's license parsing (default) - disables the feature.
•
Embedded driver's license parsing - this does not require Motorola software (.DLL).
Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the digital
scanner outputs. See Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page
14-3 for more information.
As jurisdictional updates become available, Motorola updates a series of bar codes on the Motorola Web
site: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support.
These bar codes contain embedded software. Scanning these in conjunction with the bar codes on page
14-3 download jurisdictional software updates to the digital scanner. The updates reside in the digital
scanner's Flash memory and apply when the digital scanner is next used.
•
Server based driver's license parsing - this requires Motorola software (.DLL).
The digital scanner recognizes the same ID cards, encrypts the content, and sends it to a host side
application that can use Motorola's server based parsing algorithms. Download/install the software from the
Motorola Web site at: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/support.
When the Motorola .DLL installs on the host server along with a custom driver's license application, the
Symbol DS6708-DL digital scanner can read 2D bar codes on standard US driver's licenses and AAMVA
compliant ID cards to produce formatted data. Use this data for age verification, credit card application
information, and more.
The Motorola driver's license Software Developer Kit (SDK), available on CD from Motorola, provides
scanner software, sample code, a demo application and Help to develop the application necessary to
generate formatted driver's license information.
As jurisdictional updates become available, Motorola updates the .DLL on the Motorola Web site.
Scan the appropriate bar code below to program the digital scanner.
*No Driver’s License Parsing
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
Server Based Driver’s License Parsing
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 3
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing)
To begin programming a parsing rule:
1. Scan Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule below.
2. Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 14-21 to complete the parsing rule.
3. After entering the entire rule, scan Save Driver’s License Parse Rule to save the rule.
To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
below. Any previously saved rule is retained.
To erase a programmed saved rule, scan Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules.
NOTE Only ONE driver’s license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time. Saving a new rule replaces
the prior rule.
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules
14 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
The parse fields currently supported begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs
may have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial and others may have a single field with the entire
name. In addition, some IDs may expire on the subject's birth date and the actual expiration date field may only
indicate the year. In order to present data in a consistent format, the following nine bar codes return data that may be
calculated from the actual data contained within the ID bar code.
First Name
Middle Name/Initial
Last Name
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
Expiration Date
Birth Date
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 5
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Issue Date
ID Number (Formatted)
14 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes
AAMVA Issuer ID
Full Name
Last Name
First Name
Middle Name / Initial
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 7
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Mailing Address Line 1
Mailing Address Line 2
Mailing Address City
Mailing Address State
Mailing Address Postal Code
Home Address Line 1
Home Address Line 2
14 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Home Address City
Home Address State
Home Address Postal Code
License ID Number
License Class
License Restrictions
License Endorsements
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 9
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Height (Feet and/or Inches)
Height (Centimeters)
Weight (Pounds)
Weight (Kilograms)
Eye Color
Hair Color
License Expiration Date
14 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Birth Date
Gender
License Issue Date
Social Security Number
Permit Class
Permit Expiration Date
Permit ID Number
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 11
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Permit Issue Date
Permit Restrictions
Permit Endorsements
AKA Social Security Name
AKA Full Name
AKA Last Name
AKA First Name
14 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
AKA Middle Name / Initial
AKA Name Suffix
AKA Name Prefix
AKA Birth Date
Issue Timestamp
Number of Duplicates
Medical Codes
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 13
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Organ Donor
Nonresident
Customer ID
Weight Range
Document Discriminator
Country
Federal Commission Codes
14 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Place of Birth
Audit Information
Inventory Control
Race / Ethnicity
Std Vehicle Class
Std Endorsements
Std Restrictions
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 15
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)
Class Description
Endorsement Description
Restrictions Description
Height in Inches
Height in Centimeters
Parser Version ID Bar Codes
Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification
Parser Version ID
14 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parsing Rule Example
Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the digital scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and
last names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing
address postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver’s license bar code.
NOTE This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, scan Enable Function Key
Mapping on page 6-11 in place of the Send Control M (Carriage Return) bar codes.
1
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
2
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
3
First Name
4
Send Space
5
Middle Name / Initial
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 17
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
6
Send Space
7
Last Name
8
Send Control M (Carriage Return)
9
Mailing Address Line 1
10
Send Space
11
Mailing Address Line 2
14 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
12
Send Control M (Carriage Return)
13
Mailing Address City
14
Send Space
15
Mailing Address State
16
Send Space
17
Mailing Address Postal Code
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 19
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
18
Send Control M (Carriage Return)
19
Birth Date
20
Send Control M (Carriage Return)
21
Save Driver’s Licence Parse Rule
14 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Field Update Procedure
Scan the following bar codes in order to perform a field update.
This update COMPLETELY REPLACES any prior updates that were done and overrides any embedded parsing
software currently programmed in the digital scanner.
1. Field Update Start.
Field Update Start
2. Scan the entire set of PDF bar codes provided separately.
3. Field Update End.
Field Update End
Scan Erase all Field Updates to completely remove all previous updates. It is not necessary to scan this bar code
before performing a normal field update. Scanning this bar code ensures that only the parsing software currently in
the digital scanner is used for parsing.
Erase all Field Updates
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 21
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on page A-1.
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send.
*Set All Defaults
Send Control A
Send Control B
14 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
Send Control I (Tab)
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 23
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M (Carriage Return)
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
14 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 25
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
14 - 26 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send.
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 27
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
14 - 28 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 29
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
14 - 30 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 31
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
Send D
Send E
Send F
14 - 32 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 33
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
14 - 34 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 35
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
14 - 36 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 37
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
14 - 38 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
Driver’s License Set Up (DS6708-DL) 14 - 39
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
14 - 40 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chapter 15 Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF
to edit scan data to suit particular requirements.
To implement ADF, scan a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 15-7, or install the 123Scan utility (see
Chapter 12, 123Scan) which allows programming the digital scanner with ADF rules.
Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters. To add a prefix or suffix value for
such bar codes, use Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-17. Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in
segments of length 252 or less (depending on the host selected), and applies the rule to each segment
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions
ADF uses rules to customize data. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One
rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions.
For instance, a data formatting rule could be:
Criteria: When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is the string “129”,
Actions: pad all sends with zeros to length 8,
send all data up to X,
send a space.
Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following: 00001299<space>. If you scan a Code 39
bar code of 1299X15598, this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria.
The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs.
15 - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Using ADF Bar Codes
When programming a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before scanning.
To program each data formatting rule:
•
Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 15-7.
•
Specify Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128),
code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits “129”). See Criteria on page
15-10.
•
Select Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to
format the data for transmission. See Actions on page 15-26.
•
Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 15-8. This places the rule in the “top” position in the
rule buffer.
•
To correct any errors, see Erase on page 15-8 to erase criteria, actions, and entire rules.
.Beeper Definitions on page 2-2 guide through the programming steps.
ADF Bar Code Menu Example
This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data.
An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their
own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the
manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes have the following format:
MMMMMPPPPPDD
Where: M = Manufacturer ID
P = Part Number
D = Destination Code
The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID <CTRL M>, part number
<CTRL P>, and destination code <CTRL D>. At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code.
The following rules must be entered:
When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL
M>, send the next 5 characters, send the part number key <CTRL P>, send the next 2 characters, send the
destination code key <CTRL D>.
When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>.
To enter these rules, see the following steps.
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 3
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 15-7 High High
2 Code 128 15-10 High High
3 Send next 5 characters 15-27 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 15-49 High High
5 Send next 5 characters 15-27 High High
6 Send <CTRL P> 15-49 High High
7 Send next 2 characters 15-26 High High
8 Send <CTRL D> 15-48 High High
9 Save Rule 15-8 High Low High Low
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 15-7 High High
2UPC/EAN 15-12 High High
3 Send all remaining data 15-26 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 15-49 High High
5 Save Rule 15-8 High Low High Low
If you make an error while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 15-8. If you already
saved the rule, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 15-8.
Alternate Rule Sets
You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed. This is useful
to format the same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following
information:
Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits)
The bar code might look like this:
245671243701500
where:
Class = 24
Stock Number = 56712437
Price = 01500
Ordinarily, data transmits as follows:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
01500 (enter key)
But, when there is a sale, send only the following:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
15 - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
and the cashier keys the price manually.
To implement this, first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation, such as:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class
key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key.
The “sale” rule may look like this:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class
key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key.
To switch between the two sets of rules, program a “switching rule” that specifies the type of bar code to scan to
switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the
cashier to scan the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, enter the following rule:
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1.
Program another rule to switch back.
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1.
Or include the switching back to normal rules in the “sale” rule:
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8
characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1.
For optimal results, scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 15-9 after programming a rule belonging to an
alternate rule set.
In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate
bar codes on page 15-9.
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes)
The order of programming individual rules is important. Program the most general rule first.
All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the “top” of a rules list. If
you create three rules, the list is configured as follows:
Third Rule
Second Rule
First Rule
When you scan data, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches (and therefore,
if the actions occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be
sure to program the most general rule first.
For example, if the THIRD rule states:
When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key.
and the SECOND rule states:
When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key,
then send all remaining data.
and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12, the THIRD rule applies, and the SECOND rule appears to not
function.
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 5
Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules. Scan options are entered as ADF rules,
and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the digital scanner, this applies to prefix/suffix
programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 4-18.
These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order you create them is also important.
Default Rules
Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules
burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Disable default rules by
entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer:
When receiving scan data, send all data.
Since this rule always applies, ADF never applies the default rules.
ADF Bar Codes
Table 15-1 lists the bar codes available through ADF.
Table 15-1
ADF Bar Codes
Parameter Page
Number
Special Commands 15-7
Pause Duration 15-7
Begin New Rule 15-7
Save Rule 15-8
Erase 15-8
Quit Entering Rules 15-8
Disable Rule Set 15-9
Criteria 15-10
Code Types 15-10
Code Lengths 15-17
1 Character
-
6 Characters 15-17
7 Characters
-
13 Characters 15-18
14 Characters
-
20 Characters 15-19
21 Characters
-
27 Characters 15-20
28 Characters
-
30 Characters 15-21
Specific String at Start 15-21
Specific String, Any Location 15-22
Specific String Search 15-22
15 - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Any Message OK 15-22
Numeric Keypad 15-23
Rule Belongs To Set 15-25
Actions 15-26
Send Data 15-26
Send Data Up To Character
15-26
Send Next Character
15-26
Send All Data That Remains
15-26
Send Next 2 Characters
-
Send Next 20 Characters 15-26
Move Cursor 15-31
Send Pause 15-32
Skip Ahead 15-33
Skip Back 15-34
Send Preset Value 15-36
Remove All Spaces 15-37
Crunch All Spaces 15-37
Stop Space Removal 15-37
Remove Leading Zeros 15-37
Stop Zero Removal 15-37
Pad Data with Spaces 15-38
Pad Data with Zeros 15-42
Beeps 15-47
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) 15-47
Keyboard Characters 15-52
Send ALT Characters 15-66
Send Keypad Characters 15-71
Send Function Key 15-76
Send F1 Key
-
Send F24 Key 15-76
Send PF1 Key
-
Send PF30 Key 15-79
Send Right Control Key 15-83
Table 15-1
ADF Bar Codes (Continued)
Parameter Page
Number
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 7
Special Commands
Pause Duration
Use this parameter, along with Send Pause on page 15-32, to insert a pause in the data transmission. Set the
pause by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes) from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes representing a
0.1 second in the range of 0.1 to 9.9. For example, scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0.1 second pause; 0 and
5 inserts a 0.5 second delay. The default is 1 second. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on
page D-2.
Pause Duration
Begin New Rule
Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule
.
Begin New Rule
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters 15-84
Send GUI 0
-
Send GUI 9 15-84
Send GUI A
-
Send GUI Z 15-85
Turn On/Off Rule Sets 15-89
Alphanumeric Keyboard 15-91
Space
-
‘ 15-91
0
-
9 15-95
A
-
Z 15-96
Cancel 15-100
End of Message 15-100
a
-
z 15-100
{
-
~ 15-104
Table 15-1
ADF Bar Codes (Continued)
Parameter Page
Number
15 - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Save Rule
Scan the bar code below to save the rule.
Save Rule
Erase
Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Erase Criteria And Start Again
Erase Actions And Start Again
Erase Previously Saved Rule
Erase All Rules
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 9
Disable Rule Set
Use these bar codes to disable rule sets.
Disable Rule Set 1
Disable Rule Set 2
Disable Rule Set 3
Disable Rule Set 4
Disable All Rule Sets
15 - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Criteria
Code Types
Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule. Scan the codes in succession, prior to selecting other
criteria. To select all code types, do not scan any code type.
Code 39
Codabar
GS1 DataBar-14
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
Code 128
D 2 OF 5
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 11
Code Types (continued)
IATA 2 OF 5
I 2 OF 5
Code 93
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
ISSN
15 - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code Types (continued)
MSI
GS1-128
(formerly UCC/EAN-128
UPC-E1
Bookland EAN
Trioptic Code 39
Code 11
Code 32
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 13
Code Types (continued)
ISBT 128
Coupon Code
Chinese 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
US Postnet
US Planet
UK Postal
15 - 14 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code Types (continued)
Japan Postal
Australian Postal
Netherlands KIX Code
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
UPU FICS Postal
PDF417
MicroPDF
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 15
Code Types (continued)
Macro PDF
Macro MicroPDF
MaxiCode
Data Matrix
QR Code
MicroQR
TLC 39
15 - 16 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code Types (continued)
UPC/EAN Composites
GS1 DataBar and GS1-128 Composites
Aztec
Aztec Rune
NOTE When selecting composite bar codes, enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data, or data from
an application that uses symbol separators.
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 17
Code Lengths
Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. Select one length
per rule only. Do not select any code length to select code types of any length.
1 Character
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
15 - 18 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code Lengths (continued)
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
10 Characters
11 Characters
12 Characters
13 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 19
Code Lengths (continued)
14 Characters
15 Characters
16 Characters
17 Characters
18 Characters
19 Characters
20 Characters
15 - 20 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code Lengths (continued)
21 Characters
22 Characters
23 Characters
24 Characters
25 Characters
26 Characters
27 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 21
Message Containing A Specific Data String
Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or
contains a specific character or data string.
There are 5 features:
•
Specific String at Start
•
Specific String, Any Location
•
Specific String Search
•
Any Message OK
•
Rule Belongs to Set
Specific String at Start
1. Scan the following bar code.
2. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric
Keyboard on page 15-91.
3. Scan End of Message bar code on page 15-100.
Specific String At Start
Code Lengths (continued)
28 Characters
29 Characters
30 Characters
15 - 22 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Specific String, Any Location
1. Scan the following bar code.
2. Enter a location by scanning a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading “zero” if necessary)
using the Numeric Keypad on page 15-23.
3. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric
Keyboard on page 15-91.
4. Scan End of Message bar code on page 15-100.
Specific String Any Location
Specific String Search
1. Scan the following bar code.
2. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 10) using the
Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-91.
3. Scan End of Message on page 15-100.
Any Message OK
Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types, regardless of information contained.
Specific String Search
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 23
Numeric Keypad
Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
15 - 24 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Numeric Keypad (continued)
7
8
9
Cancel
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 25
Rule Belongs To Set
Select the set to which a rule belongs. There are four possible rule sets. See Alternate Rule Sets on page 15-3 for
more information about rule sets.
Rule Belongs To Set 1
Rule Belongs To Set 2
Rule Belongs To Set 3
Rule Belongs To Set 4
15 - 26 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Actions
Select how to format the data for transmission.
Send Data
Send all data that follows, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on
page 15-91, or send the next X characters. Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here, and can
be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20. For instance, to send the next 28 characters, scan Send
Next 20 Characters, then Send Next 8 Characters.
Send Data Up To Character
Send All Data That Remains
Send Next Character
Send Next 2 Characters
Send Next 3 Characters
Send Next 4 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 27
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 5 Characters
Send Next 6 Characters
Send Next 7 Characters
Send Next 8 Characters
Send Next 9 Characters
Send Next 10 Characters
Send Next 11 Characters
15 - 28 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 12 Characters
Send Next 13 Characters
Send Next 14 Characters
Send Next 15 Characters
Send Next 16 Characters
Send Next 17 Characters
Send Next 18 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 29
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 19 Characters
Send Next 20 Characters
15 - 30 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Setup Field(s)
Table 15-2
Setup Field(s) Definitions
Parameter Description Page
Move Cursor
Move Cursor To a Character
Scan the
Move Cursor To Character
, then any printable ASCII
character from the
Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-91
. This
moves the cursor to the position after the matching character. If the
character is not there, the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule.
15-31
Move Cursor to Start of Data
Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the data. 15-31
Move Cursor Past a Character
This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences of a
selected character. For example, if the selected character is ‘A’, then
the cursor moves past ‘A’, ‘AA’, ‘AAA’, etc. Scan the
Move Cursor Past
Character
, then select a character from the
Alphanumeric Keyboard
.
If the character is not there, the cursor does not move (i.e., has no
effect).
15-31
Move Cursor Past a Specific
String
This action moves the cursor past the first occurrence of a selected
string. Scan
Move Cursor Past Specific String
, then select the
character(s) (up to 10) using the
Alphanumeric Keyboard
. Scan the
End of Message bar code on page 15-100
.
15-31
Move Cursor to Specific String
and Replace
This action moves the cursor to the first occurrence of a selected string
and replaces the string with another user-defined string. Scan
Move
Cursor to Specific String and Replace
, then enter an alphanumeric
string representing the character(s) (up to 10) to match and delete
using the
Alphanumeric Keyboard
. Scan the
End of Message
. Enter
another alphanumeric string representing the character(s) (up to 10) to
insert using the
Alphanumeric Keyboard
. Scan
End of Message
.
15-32
Move Cursor to Last
Occurrence of String and
Replace All
This action replaces all occurrences of a selected string with another
user-defined string, and moves the cursor to the beginning of the last
occurrence. Scan
Move Cursor to Last Occurrence of String and
Replace All
, then enter an alphanumeric string representing the
character(s) (up to 10) to match and delete using the
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
. Scan the
End of Message
. Enter another alphanumeric
string representing the character(s) (up to 10) to insert using the
Alphanumeric Keyboard
. Scan
End of Message
.
15-32
Skip to End
Scan
Skip to End
to move the cursor to the end of the data.
15-32
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 31
Move Cursor
Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning
a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 15-91.
Skip Ahead “N” Characters
Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions ahead
to move the cursor. 15-33
Skip Back “N” Characters
Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back to
move the cursor. 15-34
Send Preset Value
Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code. Set
these values using the prefix/suffix values in
Table 7-4 on page 7-20
.
Value 1 = Scan Suffix
Value 2 = Scan Prefix
Values 3-6 are not applicable
15-34
Table 15-2
Setup Field(s) Definitions (Continued)
Parameter Description Page
NOTE If there is no match and the rule fails, the next rule is checked.
Move Cursor To Character
Move Cursor To Start
Move Cursor Past Character
Move Cursor Past Specific String
15 - 32 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Setup Field(s) (continued)
Send Pause
Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. See Pause Duration on page 15-7 to set the
length of this pause.
Move Cursor to Specific String and Replace
Move Cursor to Last Occurrence
of String and Replace All
Skip to End
Send Pause
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 33
Skip Ahead
Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters.
Skip Ahead 1 Character
Skip Ahead 2 Characters
Skip Ahead 3 Characters
Skip Ahead 4 Characters
Skip Ahead 5 Characters
Skip Ahead 6 Characters
Skip Ahead 7 Characters
15 - 34 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Skip Back
Use the following bar codes to skip back characters.
Skip Ahead (continued)
Skip Ahead 8 Characters
Skip Ahead 9 Characters
Skip Ahead 10 Characters
Skip Back 1 Character
Skip Back 2 Characters
Skip Back 3 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 35
Skip Back (continued)
Skip Back 4 Characters
Skip Back 5 Characters
Skip Back 6 Characters
Skip Back 7 Characters
Skip Back 8 Characters
Skip Back 9 Characters
Skip Back 10 Characters
15 - 36 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Preset Value
Use these bar codes to send preset values. See Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-17 to set these values.
Send Prefix
Send Suffix
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 37
Modify Data
Modify data as described below. The following actions work for all commands that follow it within a rule.
Programming pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters, adds three
zeros to the first send, and the next send is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send
Keystroke or Send Preset Value options.
Remove All Spaces
To remove all spaces in the commands that follow, scan the bar code below.
Remove All Spaces
Crunch All Spaces
To leave one space between words, scan the bar code below. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces.
Crunch All Spaces
Stop Space Removal
Scan the bar code below to disable space removal.
Stop Space Removal
Remove Leading Zeros
Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros.
Remove Leading Zeros
Stop Zero Removal
Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros.
Stop Zero Removal
15 - 38 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Spaces
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. Use Send commands to
activate this parameter.
Pad Spaces To Length 1
Pad Spaces To Length 2
Pad Spaces To Length 3
Pad Spaces To Length 4
Pad Spaces To Length 5
Pad Spaces To Length 6
Pad Spaces To Length 7
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 39
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 8
Pad Spaces To Length 9
Pad Spaces To Length 10
Pad Spaces To Length 11
Pad Spaces To Length 12
Pad Spaces To Length 13
Pad Spaces To Length 14
15 - 40 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 15
Pad Spaces To Length 16
Pad Spaces To Length 17
Pad Spaces To Length 18
Pad Spaces To Length 19
Pad Spaces To Length 20
Pad Spaces To Length 21
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 41
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 22
Pad Spaces To Length 23
Pad Spaces To Length 24
Pad Spaces To Length 25
Pad Spaces To Length 26
Pad Spaces To Length 27
Pad Spaces To Length 28
15 - 42 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. Use Send commands to activate
this parameter.
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 29
Pad Spaces To Length 30
Stop Pad Spaces
Pad Zeros To Length 1
Pad Zeros To Length 2
Pad Zeros To Length 3
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 43
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 4
Pad Zeros To Length 5
Pad Zeros To Length 6
Pad Zeros To Length 7
Pad Zeros To Length 8
Pad Zeros To Length 9
Pad Zeros To Length 10
15 - 44 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 11
Pad Zeros To Length 12
Pad Zeros To Length 13
Pad Zeros To Length 14
Pad Zeros To Length 15
Pad Zeros To Length 16
Pad Zeros To Length 17
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 45
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 18
Pad Zeros To Length 19
Pad Zeros To Length 20
Pad Zeros To Length 21
Pad Zeros To Length 22
Pad Zeros To Length 23
Pad Zeros To Length 24
15 - 46 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 25
Pad Zeros To Length 26
Pad Zeros To Length 27
Pad Zeros To Length 28
Pad Zeros To Length 29
Pad Zeros To Length 30
Stop Pad Zeros
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 47
Beeps
Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule.
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send.
Beep Once
Beep Twice
Beep Three Times
Send Control 2
Send Control A
Send Control B
15 - 48 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
Send Control I
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 49
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
15 - 50 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 51
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
15 - 52 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send.
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Send !
Send “
Send #
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 53
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
15 - 54 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 55
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
15 - 56 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 57
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send D
Send E
Send F
15 - 58 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 59
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
15 - 60 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 61
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
15 - 62 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 63
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
15 - 64 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 65
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
15 - 66 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send ALT Characters
Send Alt 2
Send Alt A
Send Alt B
Send Alt C
Send Alt D
Send Alt E
Send Alt F
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 67
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt G
Send Alt H
Send Alt I
Send Alt J
Send Alt K
Send Alt L
Send Alt M
15 - 68 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt N
Send Alt O
Send Alt P
Send Alt Q
Send Alt R
Send Alt S
Send Alt T
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 69
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt U
Send Alt V
Send Alt W
Send Alt X
Send Alt Y
Send Alt Z
Send Alt [
15 - 70 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt \
Send Alt ]
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 71
Send Keypad Characters
Send Keypad *
Send Keypad +
Send Keypad -
Send Keypad .
Send Keypad /
Send Keypad 0
Send Keypad 1
15 - 72 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 2
Send Keypad 3
Send Keypad 4
Send Keypad 5
Send Keypad 6
Send Keypad 7
Send Keypad 8
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 73
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 9
Send Keypad Enter
Send Keypad Numlock
Send Break Key
Send Delete Key
Send Page Up Key
Send End Key
15 - 74 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Page Down Key
Send Pause Key
Send Scroll Lock Key
Send Backspace Key
Send Tab Key
Send Print Screen Key
Send Insert Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 75
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Home Key
Send Enter Key
Send Escape Key
Send Up Arrow Key
Send Down Arrow Key
Send Left Arrow Key
Send Right Arrow Key
15 - 76 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key
Send F1 Key
Send F2 Key
Send F3 Key
Send F4 Key
Send F5 Key
Send F6 Key
Send F7 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 77
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F8 Key
Send F9 Key
Send F10 Key
Send F11 Key
Send F12 Key
Send F13 Key
Send F14 Key
15 - 78 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F15 Key
Send F16 Key
Send F17 Key
Send F18 Key
Send F19 Key
Send F20 Key
Send F21 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 79
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F22 Key
Send F23 Key
Send F24 Key
Send PF1 Key
Send PF2 Key
Send PF3 Key
Send PF4 Key
15 - 80 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF5 Key
Send PF6 Key
Send PF7 Key
Send PF8 Key
Send PF9 Key
Send PF10 Key
Send PF11 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 81
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF12 Key
Send PF13 Key
Send PF14 Key
Send PF15 Key
Send PF16 Key
Send PF17 Key
Send PF18 Key
15 - 82 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF19 Key
Send PF20 Key
Send PF21 Key
Send PF22 Key
Send PF23 Key
Send PF24 Key
Send PF25 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 83
Send Right Control Key
The Send Right Control Key action sends a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key.
Send Right Control Key
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF26 Key
Send PF27 Key
Send PF28 Key
Send PF29 Key
Send PF30 Key
15 - 84 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters
The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent
Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached
system.
Send GUI 0
Send GUI 1
Send GUI 2
Send GUI 3
Send GUI 4
Send GUI 5
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 85
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI 6
Send GUI 7
Send GUI 8
Send GUI 9
Send GUI A
Send GUI B
Send GUI C
15 - 86 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI D
Send GUI E
Send GUI F
Send GUI G
Send GUI H
Send GUI I
Send GUI J
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 87
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI K
Send GUI L
Send GUI M
Send GUI N
Send GUI O
Send GUI P
Send GUI Q
15 - 88 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI R
Send GUI S
Send GUI T
Send GUI U
Send GUI V
Send GUI W
Send GUI X
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 89
Turn On/Off Rule Sets
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI Y
Send GUI Z
Turn On Rule Set 1
Turn On Rule Set 2
Turn On Rule Set 3
Turn On Rule Set 4
15 - 90 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Turn On/Off Rule Sets (continued)
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Turn Off Rule Set 1
Turn Off Rule Set 2
Turn Off Rule Set 3
Turn Off Rule Set 4
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 91
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Space
#
$
%
*
+
-
(Dash)
15 - 92 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
.
,
/
!
“
&
‘
(
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 93
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
)
:
;
<
=
>
?
15 - 94 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
@
[
\
]
^
_
(Underscore)
`
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 95
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
NOTE Do not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
15 - 96 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 97
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
15 - 98 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 99
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
15 - 100 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Y
Z
Cancel
End of Message
a
b
c
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 101
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
15 - 102 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
Advanced Data Formatting 15 - 103
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
15 - 104 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
y
z
{
|
}
~
Appendix A Standard Default Parameters
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter Restore Defaults 4-4
Parameter Scanning ECh Enable 4-5
Beeper Tone 91h Medium 4-6
Beeper Volume 8Ch High 4-6
Power Mode 80h Continuous On 4-7
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 92h 1 Minute 4-8
Trigger Mode 8Ah Auto Aim 4-9
Picklist Mode F0h 92h Disabled Always 4-10
Presentation Mode F1h, 74h 3 Sec 4-11
Decode Session Timeout 88h 9.9 Sec 4-13
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 89h 0.6 Sec 4-13
Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 4-14
Fuzzy 1D Processing F1h, 02h Enable
4-14
Decode Mirror Images F1h, 19h Never
4-15
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 4-16
Prefix Value 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 4-17
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value 62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah 7013 <CR><LF> 4-17
Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 4-18
FN1 Substitution Values 67h, 6Dh Set 4-19
Transmit “No Read” Message 5Eh Disable 4-20
Synapse Interface F0h, ACh Standard Synapse Connection 4-21
Decoding Preferences
Decoding Illumination F0h 2Ah Enable 5-3
Illumination Bank Control F1h 3Bh Full Illumination 5-4
Decode Aiming Pattern F0h 32h Enable 5-5
Low Light Enhancement F1h 64h Disable
5-5
Presentation Mode Field of View F1h 61h Default (Reduced)
5-6
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 6-5
USB Country Keyboard Types
(Country Codes) North American 6-6
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 6-8
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 6-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 6-9
Emulate Keypad Disable 6-9
Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 6-10
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 6-10
Function Key Mapping Disable 6-11
Simulated Caps Lock Disable 6-11
Convert Case No Case Conversion 6-12
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 3
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard17-7
Baud Rate 9600 7-8
Parity Type None 7-10
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 7-11
Data Bits 8-Bit 7-11
Check Receive Errors Enable 7-12
Hardware Handshaking None 7-12
Software Handshaking None 7-14
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 7-16
RTS Line State Low RTS 7-17
Beep on <BEL> Disable 7-17
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 7-18
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 7-19
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 7-19
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected 8-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 8-5
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface
Controller19-5
Leading Margin 80 msec 9-6
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 9-7
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore 9-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 9-8
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 9-9
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC
Compatibles110-5
Country Types (Country Codes) North American 10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Transmit 10-8
Keystroke Delay No Delay 10-8
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 10-9
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 10-9
Caps Lock On Disable 10-10
Caps Lock Override Disable 10-10
Convert Wedge Data No Convert 10-11
Function Key Mapping Disable 10-11
FN1 Substitution Disable 10-12
Send and Make Break Send 10-12
Undecoded Scanner Emulation
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 11-5
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass
Through 11-6
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 11-7
Module Width 20 µs 11-7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert to Code 39 11-8
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 11-8
Transmission Timeout 3 seconds 11-9
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 11-10
Leading Margin 2 ms 11-10
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 11-11
123Scan Configuration Tool
123Scan Configuration None112-1
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 5
UPC/EAN
UPC-A 01h Enable 13-7
UPC-E 02h Enable 13-7
UPC-E1 0Ch Disable 13-8
EAN-8/JAN 8 04h Enable 13-8
EAN-13/JAN 13 03h Enable 13-9
Bookland EAN 53h Disable 13-9
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits) 10h Ignore 13-10
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
Supplemental 2:
F1h 43h
F1h 44h
13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 13-13
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 28h Enable 13-14
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 29h Enable 13-14
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 13-15
UPC-A Preamble 22h System Character 13-16
UPC-E Preamble 23h System Character 13-17
UPC-E1 Preamble 24h System Character 13-18
Convert UPC-E to A 25h Disable 13-19
Convert UPC-E1 to A 26h Disable 13-19
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 27h Disable 13-20
Bookland ISBN Format F1h 40h ISBN-10 13-21
UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 13-22
ISSN EAN F1h 69h Disable
13-22
Code 128
Code 128 08h Enable 13-23
Set Length(s) for Code 128 D1h D2h Any Length
13-23
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 0Eh Enable 13-25
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ISBT 128 54h Enable 13-25
ISBT Concatenation F1h 41h Disable
13-26
Check ISBT Table F1h 42h Enable
13-27
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy DFh 10
13-27
Code 39
Code 39 00h Enable 13-28
Trioptic Code 39 0Dh Disable 13-28
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(Italian Pharmacy Code) 56h Disable 13-29
Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 13-29
Set Length(s) for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 13-30
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 13-32
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 13-32
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 13-33
Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 13-33
Code 93
Code 93 09h Disable 13-36
Set Length(s) for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 13-36
Code 11
Code 11 0Ah Disable 13-38
Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 13-38
Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 13-40
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 2Fh Disable 13-41
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 06h Enable 13-41
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 13-42
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 13-44
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 13-44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 13-45
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 7
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 13-45
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 13-46
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 07h Disable 13-48
Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 13-48
CLSI Editing 36h Disable 13-50
NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 13-50
MSI
MSI 0Bh Disable 13-51
Set Length(s) for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 13-51
MSI Check Digits 32h One 13-53
Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 13-53
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 13-54
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5 F0h 98h Disable
13-54
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 F1h 6Ah Disable
13-55
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch 1 Length - 14
13-56
Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy F1h 6Dh Disable
13-57
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit F1h 6Eh Disable
13-57
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit F1h 6Fh Disable
13-58
Inverse 1D F1h 4Ah Regular 13-59
Postal Codes
US Postnet 59h Enable 13-60
US Planet 5Ah Enable 13-60
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 13-61
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UK Postal 5Bh Enable 13-61
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 13-62
Japan Postal F0h 22h Enable 13-62
Australian Postal F0h 23h Enable 13-63
Netherlands KIX Code F0h 46h Enable 13-63
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail F1h 50h Disable 13-64
UPU FICS Postal F1h 63h Disable
13-64
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar-14 F0h 52h Enable 13-65
GS1 DataBar Limited F0h 53h Enable 13-65
GS1 DataBar Expanded F0h 54h Enable 13-66
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN F0h 8Dh Disable 13-66
Composite
Composite CC-C F0h 55h Disable 13-67
Composite CC-A/B F0h 56h Disable 13-67
Composite TLC-39 F0h 73h Disable 13-68
UPC Composite Mode F0h 58h Always Linked 13-68
Composite Beep Mode F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code Type is
Decoded 13-69
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for GS1
Composite Codes
(formerly UCC/EAN Code 128 Emulation
Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes)
F0h ABh Disable 13-69
2D Symbologies
PDF417 0Fh Enable 13-70
MicroPDF417 E3h Disable 13-70
Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 13-71
Data Matrix F0h 24h Enable 13-72
Data Matrix Inverse F1h 4Ch Regular 13-72
Maxicode F0h 26h Enable 13-73
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 9
QR Code F0h 25h Enable 13-74
QR Inverse F1h 4Bh Regular 13-74
MicroQR F1h 3Dh Enable 13-75
Aztec F1h 3Eh Enable 13-75
Aztec Inverse F1h 4Dh Regular 13-76
Symbology-Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 13-77
Security Level 4Dh 1 13-79
Intercharacter Gap Size F0h 7Dh Normal 13-80
Report Version 13-80
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer 13-81
Abort Macro PDF Entry 13-81
Drivers License Parsing (DS6708-DL only)
Driver’s License Parsing No Driver’s License Parsing 14-2
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Parameter
Number Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Appendix B Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table B-1
Symbol Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B Code 39, Code 32
C Codabar
D
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated
E Code 93
F Interleaved 2 of 5
G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H Code 11
JMSI
K GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
L Bookland EAN
M Trioptic Code 39
N Coupon Code
R GS1 DataBar Family
S Matrix 2 of 5
T UCC Composite, TLC 39
U Chinese 2 of 5
B - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
X
ISSN EAN,
PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
z Aztec, Aztec Rune
P00 Data Matrix
P01
QR Code, MicroQR
P02 Maxicode
P03 US Postnet
P04 US Planet
P05 Japan Postal
P06 UK Postal
P08 Netherlands KIX Code
P09 Australian Postal
P0A USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
P0B UPU FICS Postal
Table B-1
Symbol Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character Code Type
Programming Reference B - 3
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)
c = Code Character (see Table B-2)
m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3)
Table B-2
Aim Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,
Coupon
(Code 128 portion)
d Data Matrix
E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e GS1 DataBar Family
F Codabar
G Code 93
H Code 11
I Interleaved 2 of 5
L PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
L@ TLC 39
MMSI
Q
QR Code, MicroQR
S Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
U Maxicode
z Aztec, Aztec Rune
X
Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5,
US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australian Postal,
Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail,
UPU FICS Postal
B - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters
Code Type Option Value Option
Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1 Reader has checked one check character.
3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked one check character.
7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as
]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
Code 128 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first
position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has validated check digit.
3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has checked check digit.
3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI 0 Check digits are sent.
1 No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M14123
Programming Reference B - 5
D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e. 13 digits for UPC-A,
UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1 Two digit supplemental data only.
2 Five digit supplemental data only.
3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A
or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
4 EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905
Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
Code 11 0 Single check digit
1 Two check digits
3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.
GS1 DataBar
Family No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar-14
and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier
“01”.
Note: In GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) emulation mode, GS1
DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: A GS1 DataBar-14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as
]e00110012345678902.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
B - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
EAN.UCC
Composites
(GS1 DataBar,
GS1-128, 2D
portion of UPC
composite)
Native mode transmission.
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
0 Standard data packet.
1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol
separator character.
2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
1 Data packet is a GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) symbol
(i.e., data is preceded with ]C1).
PDF417,
Micro PDF417 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417
symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted,
the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been
invoked or whether data byte 92DEC has been doubled in
transmission.
1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel
Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.
2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character
transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled.
Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro
symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape
sequences cannot be transmitted.
3 The bar code contains a GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
symbol, and the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4 The bar code contains a GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 908-909.
5 The bar code contains a GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is
transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
Programming Reference B - 7
Data Matrix 0 ECC 000-140, not supported.
1 ECC 200.
2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4 ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol
implemented.
MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary
message.
QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol.
1
Model 2 / MicroQR symbol
, ECI protocol not implemented.
2 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
first position.
4 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
5 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
6 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
Aztec
0 Aztec symbol.
C Aztec Rune symbol.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
B - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Appendix C Sample Bar Codes
Code 39
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
123ABC
0
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
C - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
EAN-13, 100%
Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
12
3
4
0
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
12345678901231
Sample Bar Codes C - 3
GS1 DataBar-14
7612341562341
PDF417
Data Matrix
NOTE DataBar-14 must be enabled to read the bar code below (see GS1 DataBar-14 on page 13-65).
C - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Maxicode
QR Code
US Postnet
UK Postal
Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).
0
1
2
3
4
D - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.
Numeric Bar Codes (continued)
5
6
7
8
9
Cancel
Appendix E ASCII Character Sets
Table E-1
ASCII Value Table
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1
1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise,
the unbold keystroke transmits.
E - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
Table E-1
ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise,
the unbold keystroke transmits.
ASCII Character Sets E - 3
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /o /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
Table E-1
ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise,
the unbold keystroke transmits.
E - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
Table E-1
ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise,
the unbold keystroke transmits.
ASCII Character Sets E - 5
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q I
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table E-1
ASCII Value Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char Keystroke
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping. Otherwise,
the unbold keystroke transmits.
E - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table E-2
ALT Key Standard Default Tables
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
ASCII Character Sets E - 7
Table E-3
USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on
either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key
to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
E - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table E-3
USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key Keystroke
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on
either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key
to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
ASCII Character Sets E - 9
Table E-4
PF Key Standard Default Table
PF Keys Keystroke
4001 PF 1
4002 PF 2
4003 PF 3
4004 PF 4
4005 PF 5
4006 PF 6
4007 PF 7
4008 PF 8
4009 PF 9
4010 PF 10
4011 PF 11
4012 PF 12
4013 PF 13
4014 PF 14
4015 PF 15
4016 PF 16
E - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table E-5
F key Standard Default Table
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F 1
5002 F 2
5003 F 3
5004 F 4
5005 F 5
5006 F 6
5007 F 7
5008 F 8
5009 F 9
5010 F 10
5011 F 11
5012 F 12
5013 F 13
5014 F 14
5015 F 15
5016 F 16
5017 F 17
5018 F 18
5019 F 19
5020 F 20
5021 F 21
5022 F 22
5023 F 23
5024 F 24
ASCII Character Sets E - 11
Table E-6
Numeric Key Standard Default Table
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 Undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
E - 12 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table E-7
Extended Keypad Standard Default Table
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Glossary
A
Aperture. The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view.
API. An interface by means of which one software component communicates with or controls another. Usually used to refer
to services provided by one software component to another, usually via software interrupts or function calls
Application Programming Interface. See API.
ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals,
punctuation marks and control characters. It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.
Autodiscrimination. The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code. After this
determination is made, the information content is decoded.
B
Bar. The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.
Bar Code. A pattern of variable-width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine-readable
form. The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin, start character, data or message character,
check character (if any), stop character, and trailing margin. Within this framework, each recognizable symbology uses
its own unique format. See Symbology.
Bar Code Density. The number of characters represented per unit of measurement (e.g., characters per inch).
Bar Height. The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width.
Bar Width. Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same
bar.
BIOS. Basic Input Output System. A collection of ROM-based code with a standard API used to interface with standard PC
hardware.
Glossary - 2 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Bit. Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data.
The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning.
Bits per Second (bps). Bits transmitted or received.
Boot or Boot-up. The process a computer goes through when it starts. During boot-up, the computer can run
self-diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software.
BOOTP. A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices. Assigns an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file.
The client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp server port (67) and the bootp server responds using the
bootp client port (68). The bootp server must have a table of all devices, associated MAC addresses and IP addresses.
bps. See Bits Per Second.
Byte. On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific
character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in
memory is used to store one ASCII character.
C
CDRH. Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This
agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.
CDRH Class 1. This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser
output were directed into the eye's pupil. There are no special operating procedures for this class.
CDRH Class 2. No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses
no danger for unintentional direct human exposure.
Character. A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function, such as a
number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications control contained in a message.
Character Set. Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology.
Check Digit. A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula
and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are
optional for other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is
decoded.
Codabar. A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( - $ : /
, +).
Code 128. A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra
symbol elements.
Code 3 of 9 (Code 39). A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types,
including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is
derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the remaining 6 are narrow.
Code 93. An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding
density than Code 39.
Glossary - 3
Code Length. Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters, not including those
characters.
Cold Boot. A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries.
COM port. Communication port; ports are identified by number, e.g., COM1, COM2.
Continuous Code. A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters. There are no
intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater information density.
Cradle. A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer, and provides a
storage place for the terminal when not in use.
D
Dead Zone. An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode.
Decode. To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the content of the specific bar code
scanned.
Decode Algorithm. A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers
encoded within a bar code symbol.
Decryption. Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data. Also see, Encryption and Key.
Depth of Field. The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain
minimum element width.
Discrete 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars, two of which are wide.
The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric
characters (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
Discrete Code. A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code.
DRAM. Dynamic random access memory.
E
EAN. European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and
symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.
Element. Generic term for a bar or space.
Encoded Area. Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including start/stop characters and data.
ENQ (RS-232). ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host.
ESD. Electro-Static Discharge
Glossary - 4 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
F
Flash Disk. An additional megabyte of non-volatile memory for storing application and configuration files.
Flash Memory. Flash memory is responsible for storing the system firmware and is non-volatile. If the system power is
interrupted the data is not be lost.
FTP. See File Transfer Protocol.
H
Hard Reset. See Cold Boot.
Host Computer. A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services as computation, database
access, supervisory programs and network control.
Hz. Hertz; A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
I
IDE. Intelligent drive electronics. Refers to the solid-state hard drive type.
IEC. International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser
operation classes based on power output during operation.
IEC (825) Class 1. This is the lowest power IEC laser classification. Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of
120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's
oscillating mirror fails.
IEEE Address. See MAC Address.
Input/Output Ports. I/O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal’s memory. Series
9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports.
Intercharacter Gap. The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code.
Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved
spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each
group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only
numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
Interleaved Bar Code. A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the first character and
the intervening spaces to represent the second.
Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved
spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each
Glossary - 5
group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only
numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
I/O Ports. interface The connection between two devices, defined by common physical characteristics, signal
characteristics, and signal meanings. Types of interfaces include RS-232 and PCMCIA.
IOCTL. Input/Output Control.
IP Address. (Internet Protocol address) The address of a computer attached to an IP network. Every client and server
station must have a unique IP address. A 32-bit address used by a computer on a IP network. Client workstations have
either a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to them each session. IP addresses are written as four
sets of numbers separated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.
IPX/SPX. Internet Package Exchange/Sequential Packet Exchange. A communications protocol for Novell. IPX is Novell’s
Layer 3 protocol, similar to XNS and IP, and used in NetWare networks. SPX is Novell's version of the Xerox SPP
protocol.
IS-95. Interim Standard 95. The EIA/TIA standard that governs the operation of CDMA cellular service. Versions include
IS-95A and IS-95B. See CDMA.
K
Key. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting.
L
LASER. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is
all the same frequency, unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy
density.
Laser Diode. A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam. This
laser type is a compact source of coherent light.
Laser Scanner. A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light.
LCD. See Liquid Crystal Display.
LED Indicator. A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays. The
semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular
chemical composition.
Light Emitting Diode. See LED.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). A display that uses liquid crystal sealed between two glass plates. The crystals are excited
by precise electrical charges, causing them to reflect light outside according to their bias. They use little electricity and
react relatively quickly. They require external light to reflect their information to the user.
Glossary - 6 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
M
MIL. 1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch.
Misread (Misdecode). A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with
the data encoded within a bar code symbol.
N
Nominal. The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and negative
deviations from this value.
Nominal Size. Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g.,
from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).
NVM. Non-Volatile Memory.
O
ODI. See Open Data-Link Interface.
Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). Novell’s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher-level
protocols. It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC (Network Interface Controller). It is capable of understanding
and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI-compatible protocol into something a NetWare
client can understand and process.
Open System Authentication. Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm.
P
PAN . Personal area network. Using Bluetooth wireless technology, PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly.
Generally, a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33-foot
range. Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network.
Parameter. A variable that can have different values assigned to it.
PC Card. A plug-in expansion card for laptop computers and other devices, also called a PCMCIA card. PC Cards are
85.6mm long x 54 mm wide, and have a 68 pin connector. There are several different kinds:
• Type I; 3.3 mm high; use - RAM or Flash RAM
• Type II; 5 mm high; use - modems, LAN adaptors
• Type III; 10.5 high; use - Hard Disks
PCMCIA. Personal Computer Memory Card Interface Association. See PC Card.
Glossary - 7
Percent Decode. The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode. In a
well-designed bar code scanning system, that probability should approach near 100%.
PING. (Packet Internet Groper) An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online. It is used to
test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response.
Print Contrast Signal (PCS). Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and spaces of a
symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is
the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.
Programming Mode. The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See Scanning Mode.
Q
Quiet Zone. A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows
the stop character.
QWERTY. A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards. “QWERTY” refers
to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys.
R
RAM. Random Access Memory. Data in RAM can be accessed in random order, and quickly written and read.
Reflectance. Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.
Resolution. The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a
particular device or method.
RF. Radio Frequency.
ROM. Read-Only Memory. Data stored in ROM cannot be changed or removed.
Router. A device that connects networks and supports the required protocols for packet filtering. Routers are typically used
to extend the range of cabling and to organize the topology of a network into subnets. See Subnet.
RS-232. An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard that defines the connector, connector pins, and signals used to
transfer data serially from one device to another.
Glossary - 8 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
S
Scan Area. Area intended to contain a symbol.
Scanner. An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars
and spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are: 1) Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar
code,; 2) Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light reflected from spaces); 3) Signal
conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern.
Scanning Mode. The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a bar code.
Scanning Sequence. A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar
code menus.
SDK. Software Development Kit
Self-Checking Code. A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar
code symbol.
Shared Key. Shared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the AP and the MU share an authentication key.
SHIP. Symbol Host Interface Program.
SID. System Identification code. An identifier issued by the FCC for each market. It is also broadcast by the cellular carriers
to allow cellular devices to distinguish between the home and roaming service.
Soft Reset. See Warm Boot.
Space. The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars.
Specular Reflection. The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code.
Start/Stop Character. A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and
scanning direction. The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.
STEP. Symbol Terminal Enabler Program.
Subnet. A subset of nodes on a network that are serviced by the same router. See Router.
Subnet Mask. A 32-bit number used to separate the network and host sections of an IP address. A custom subnet mask
subdivides an IP network into smaller subsections. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address
to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets. Default is often 255.255.255.0.
Substrate. A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed.
SVTP. Symbol Virtual Terminal Program.
Symbol. A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop
characters, quiet zones, data characters and check characters.
Symbol Aspect Ratio. The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.
Symbol Height. The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row.
Glossary - 9
Symbol Length. Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character
to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character.
Symbology. The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN,
Code 39, PDF417, etc.).
T
TCP/IP. (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar
systems. This standard is the protocol of the Internet and has become the global standard for communications. TCP
provides transport functions, which ensures that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end.
UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee delivery. It is widely used for real-time voice and video
transmissions where erroneous packets are not retransmitted. IP provides the routing mechanism. TCP/IP is a routable
protocol, which means that all messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the address of a
destination network. This allows TCP/IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the
world, hence its use in the worldwide Internet. Every client and server in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address, which
is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup.
Telnet. A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a
terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program.
Terminal Emulation. A “terminal emulation” emulates a character-based mainframe session on a remote non-mainframe
terminal, including all display features, commands and function keys. The VC5000 Series supports Terminal Emulations
in 3270, 5250 and VT220.
Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR). A program under DOS that ends its foreground execution to remain resident in
memory to service hardware/software interrupts, providing background operation. It remains in memory and may
provide services on behalf of other DOS programs.
TFTP. (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the TCP/IP FTP (File Transfer Protocol) protocol that has no directory or
password capability. It is the protocol used for upgrading firmware, downloading software and remote booting of diskless
devices.
Tolerance. Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. See TCP/IP.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. See TFTP.
TSR. See Terminate and Stay Resident.
U
UDP. User Datagram Protocol. A protocol within the IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery
is not required. For example, UDP is used for real-time audio and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored,
because there is no time to retransmit. If UDP is used and a reliable delivery is required, packet sequence checking and
error notification must be written into the applications.
Glossary - 10 Symbol DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC. Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two
spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States.
V
Visible Laser Diode (VLD). A solid state device which produces visible laser light.
W
Warm Boot. A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs. All data that is not saved to flash
memory is lost.
Index
Numerics
123Scan parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2D bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73
MicroPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
MicroQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
A
AAMVA
field parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . .14-6, 14-7, 14-8,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9, 14-10, 14-11,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12, 14-13, 14-14, 14-15
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1, 15-26
move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30, 15-32
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-91
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
bar code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1, 15-10
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
move cursor past a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
move cursor past string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
move cursor to last occurrence of
string and replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
move cursor to string and replace . . . . . . . . . 15-30
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23, 15-24
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-66
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-76
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-71
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
skip cursor to end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
specific string
any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-89, 15-90
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1, 15-26
Index - 2 DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-91
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1, 15-10
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-23, 15-24
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-66
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-76
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-71
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30, 15-32
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-89, 15-90
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
aiming options
decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
aiming tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ASCII values
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
B
bar codes
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
AAMVA field parsing
set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6, 14-7, 14-8,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9, 14-10, 14-11,
. . . . . . . . . . 14-12, 14-13, 14-14, 14-15
ADF list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
beep style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
check for decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71
code 39
transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
convert bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
convert newer code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72
data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
decode mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
digital scanner
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
discrete 2 of 5
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
driver’s license field parsing
set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-4, 14-5
driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
field updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . . . 13-81
fuzzy 1D processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
IBM 468X/469X
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
illumination bank control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . 10-9
caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
country keyboard types (country codes) . . . 10-6
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Index - 3
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
leading margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10, 11-11
low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73
MicroPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
MicroQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75
miscellaneous
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
module width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
parameter pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
picklist modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
presentation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12, 7-13
host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14, 7-15
stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
scanner emulation
beep style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
check for decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
convert bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
convert newer code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
leading margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10, 11-11
module width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
parameter pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
transmission timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
scanner emulation host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
symbologies
Australian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33, 13-34
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48, 13-49
codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . 13-38, 13-39, 13-43
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23, 13-25
code 128 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24, 13-30
code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36, 13-37
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN . . . . . 13-66
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65
GS1 DataBar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66
GS1 DataBar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65
GS1 DataBar-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26, 13-27
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . 13-27
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-62
matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
matrix 2 of 5 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51
MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51, 13-52
MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . 13-58
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . 13-62
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Index - 4 DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . . . . . . . . .13-14, 13-15
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
USPS 4CB/one code/intelligent mail . . . . 13-64
transmission timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
trigger modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
UPC/EAN
coupon code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
supp redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
UPC/EAN/JAN
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
USB
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
wand emulation
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
convert all bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
leading margin (quiet zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
C
cables
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-5
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
character sets
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
codabar bar codes
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-48, 13-49
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
code 11 bar codes
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38, 13-39, 13-43
code 128 bar codes
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23, 13-25
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26, 13-27
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71
code 39 bar codes
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33, 13-34
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24, 13-30
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 93 bar codes
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36, 13-37
code identifiers
AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
code types
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
composite bar codes
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
connecting
IBM 468X/469X interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 1-5
keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
scanner emulation interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
wand emulation interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
conventions
notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
D
Data Matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-72
decode zones
standard range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
default parameters
IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
imaging preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Index - 5
standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
digital scanner
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
driver’s license
field parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-4, 14-5
parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
parsing rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
E
exposure options
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
illumination bank control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
G
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-65
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . 13-66
H
host types
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
I
IBM 468X/469X
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
illumination bank control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
imaging preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
K
keyboard wedge
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
L
LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
M
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-81
flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-81
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73
MicroPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
Motorola enterprise mobility support . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
mounting
desk mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
MSI bar codes
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51, 13-52
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
N
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
P
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70
pinouts
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
Australian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-62
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-62
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60
USPS 4CB/one code/intelligent mail . . . . . . . . 13-64
power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Index - 6 DS6708 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Q
QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74
quiet zone (leading margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
R
RS-232
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5, 7-7
S
sample bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
scanner emulation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
scanner emulation default parameters . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
scanning
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-2, 13-2
hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-7
sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-2, 13-1
switching modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
setup
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . 10-2
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . . . 8-2
connecting using scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . 11-2
connecting using wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
U
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
UPC/EAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14, 13-15
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
USB
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
W
wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
wand emulation
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Thank you for your input—We value your comments.
Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form
to: (631) 627-7184, or mail to:
Motorola, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza M/S B-10
Holtsville, NY 11742-1300
Attention: Advanced Data Capture
Technical Publications Manager
Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level)
How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What can we do to further improve our manuals?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
Important If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number for
your area. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.
Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar
72E-86039-06 Revision A - October 2009
Motorola, Inc.
One Motorola Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742, USA
1-800-927-9626
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
© Motorola, Inc. 2009

Navigation menu